JP7314004B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there has been proposed a technique for displaying character information of characters' lines in different modes during execution of a super ready-to-win effect (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-77592 A

According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, there is a risk that the display control may be inconvenient, such as an increase in the control load for displaying the moving image or difficulty in recognizing the character image.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control .

(1) A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image,
The effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state,
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
When the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component configured by the first character information and a second component configured by the first display setting information, and second data for displaying the second character image using the first component configured by the second character information and the second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table includes the first data, the third data for displaying the third character image using the first component configured by the third character information and the second component configured by the third display setting information,
When a specific element is set as a character image component, an effect image can be added around the character image and displayed,
a ratio of displaying a character image using the first character image data table or the second character image data table differs between when the setting value is the first setting value and when the setting value is the second setting value;
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image,
The effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state,
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
When the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component configured by the first character information and a second component configured by the first display setting information, and second data for displaying the second character image using the first component configured by the second character information and the second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table includes the first data, the third data for displaying the third character image using the first component configured by the third character information and the second component configured by the third display setting information,
When a specific element is set as a character image component, an effect image can be added around the character image and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.
The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM),
An image generating means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) that arranges a three-dimensional object (object OB) in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), draws an image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) when viewed from a specific viewpoint by perspective projection, and generates an effect image (image IM),
The image generation means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123)
Performing predetermined processing (combining processing) for associating a predetermined image (effect image EG) imitating the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display device (image display device 5) with a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space),
changing (deforming or moving) the three-dimensional object (object OB) that has undergone the predetermined processing (combining processing), and generating an effect image (image IM) by drawing an image of the three-dimensional object after the change when viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) by perspective projection;
The predetermined image (effect image EG) includes update information (first effect information, second effect information) to be updated, and can be displayed on the image display device (image display device 5) as a effect image (image IM) without performing the predetermined process (combining process).
The image generating means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) performs texture mapping based on the predetermined image (effect image EG) on a three-dimensional object (object OB) placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space) as the predetermined processing (combining processing), changes (transforms or moves) the three-dimensional object on which the texture mapping is performed, and creates an image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) after the change when viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0). is drawn by perspective projection to regenerate the effect image (image IM),
moreover,
Effect executing means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.) for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.) for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling display of moving images using the data in the first storage area;
A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of character images using the data in the second storage area,
The data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information),
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (see FIG. 16-7, for example).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. Also, the processing load on the image generating means can be reduced. Appropriate display control is also possible.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) will be reached;
Suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings;
A specific effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating a first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating a second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the amusement of a game in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C2,
The above -mentioned notice production control means (direct control CPU120) can be different from the attitude of the notice production corresponding to the 1st display (1st production image 27TM100) and the constitution of the notice production corresponding to the second display (27 tm 200) (27 tm 200), cut -in, cut -in. Image ("Great Chance!" And "Chance!" And Characters (Character B and Character A) that appear during super reach)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine of means C2 or means C3,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the updating of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other when the specific effect ends. Common production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even after the specific performance is finished, updating of either one of the first display and the second display is continued, so that the player can feel interest in the continuation of the update of the display.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C4,
The suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (first set suggesting effect) in which the ratio of displaying special displays (combination of [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbols) differs according to the set value,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a first suggestive effect (first set suggestive effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C5,
The suggesting effect includes a second suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is "6"),
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) corresponding to the second display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C6,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Operation prompting display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350) for prompting an operation;
An operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) that can set the operation unit (push button 31B) in an operation promoting mode (blinking mode) to prompt the operation,
The operation prompting display means (effect control CPU 120) can display an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) corresponding to the second display,
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) while the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C7,
Provided with a performance device that is operable when the specified performance is not executed and is inoperable when the specified performance is executed (in the case of a variation pattern not accompanied by a split performance, it is possible to decide to execute the performance using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B, but in the case of a variation pattern that accompanies the split performance, it is impossible to decide to execute the performance using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C8,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Related information display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the split effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300 is displayed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], but the movable body effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C9,
An image display means (effect control CPU 120) having a display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of parallax image display (stereoscopic image) in which a right eye image and a left eye image are alternately arranged in a horizontal direction, and a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) provided in front of the display body for preventing the player's left eye from viewing the right eye image and preventing the player's right eye from viewing the left eye image,
The image display means (display control unit 123) restricts the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (does not display the stereoscopic image when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C10,
Corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display);
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display,
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in a region (first reserved display region 27TM011, active display region 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (the display mode of the pending display and the active display is not changed when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C11,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a first notice effect (one pseudo-continuous effect) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect (twice pseudo-continuous effect) in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first notice effect,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) and continues the update of the first display (first effect image 27TM100) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect),
The ratio of execution of the second notice effect corresponding to the first display is higher than the ratio of execution of the second notice effect corresponding to the second display (the first effect image 27TM100 with a long display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200 with a short display period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a constitution, the player can expect that the first display is the one where the second notice performance is executed, and that the update will be continued even after the end of the specific performance, and the interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C12,
Variable display means (CPU 103) for executing variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variation pattern), and sets the timing for ending the specific effect to one of a plurality of end timings (timing TA1 and timing TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8) corresponding to the variable display pattern.
According to such a configuration, there is no need to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern with a specific effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and that displays a character image according to the set value before and after the setting change. With respect to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is preferable to make the player feel interested when an effect suggesting the setting is executed. The inventions relating to the means A1 to A12 and the inventions relating to the means B1 to B12 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aim to improve the interest of the presentation related to a game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) will be reached;
Suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings;
A specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating a first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating a second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing the notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and the notice effect (simulated continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200),
The suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display (in the second effect image display area 27TM200A where the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed, a predetermined movie corresponding to the variation pattern is reproduced, and the set suggestive effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by limiting the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player due to the execution of the suggestive effect and improve the interest of the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The above -mentioned notice production control means (direct control CPU120) can be different from the attitude of the notice production corresponding to the 1st display (1st production image 27TM100) and the constitution of the notice production corresponding to the second display (27 tm 200) (27 tm 200), cut -in, cut -in. Image ("Great Chance!" And "Chance!" And Characters (Character B and Character A) that appear during super reach)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the updating of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other when the specific effect ends. Common production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even after the specific performance is finished, updating of either one of the first display and the second display is continued, so that the player can feel interest in the continuation of the update of the display.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (first set suggesting effect) in which the ratio of displaying special displays (combination of [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbols) differs according to the set value,
A game machine characterized in that the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a first suggestive effect (first set suggestive effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The suggesting effect includes a second suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is "6"),
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) corresponding to the second display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Operation prompting display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350) for prompting an operation;
An operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) that can set the operation unit (push button 31B) in an operation promoting mode (blinking mode) to prompt the operation,
The operation prompting display means (effect control CPU 120) can display an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) corresponding to the second display,
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) while the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
Provided with a performance device that is operable when the specified performance is not executed and is inoperable when the specified performance is executed (in the case of a variation pattern not accompanied by a split performance, it is possible to decide to execute the performance using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B, but in the case of a variation pattern that accompanies the split performance, it is impossible to decide to execute the performance using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Related information display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the split effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300 is displayed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], but the movable body effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
An image display means (effect control CPU 120) having a display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of parallax image display (stereoscopic image) in which a right eye image and a left eye image are alternately arranged in a horizontal direction, and a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) provided in front of the display body for preventing the player's left eye from viewing the right eye image and preventing the player's right eye from viewing the left eye image,
The image display means (display control unit 123) restricts the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (does not display the stereoscopic image when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
Corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display);
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display,
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in a region (first reserved display region 27TM011, active display region 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (the display mode of the pending display and the active display is not changed when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a first notice effect (one pseudo-continuous effect) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect (twice pseudo-continuous effect) in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first notice effect,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) and continues the update of the first display (first effect image 27TM100) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect),
The ratio of execution of the second notice effect corresponding to the first display is higher than the ratio of execution of the second notice effect corresponding to the second display (the first effect image 27TM100 having a long display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200 having a short display period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a constitution, the player can expect that the first display is the one where the second notice performance is executed, and that the update will be continued even after the end of the specific performance, and the interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A11,
Variable display means (CPU 103) for executing variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variation pattern), and sets the timing for ending the specific effect to one of a plurality of end timings (timing TA1 and timing TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8) corresponding to the variable display pattern.
According to such a configuration, there is no need to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern with a specific effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) will be reached;
Suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings;
A specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating a first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating a second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display,
The preview production control means (CPU120 for directing control (direct control control)) is a pseudo -production, cut -in notice production, Super Reach, which suggests the display result of the floating display determined in the first display (1st production image 27TM100) (27 tm100) of the above (27TM100) of the above (27 tm100), and the 2nd drawing (2nd production) Image 27TM200) and notice production corresponding to the 2nd display (as an image in a movie, a pseudo -series production, cut -in notice production, super reach) can be performed.
The suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of making the mode of the suggestive effect corresponding to the first display and the mode of the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display different (the execution ratio (40%) of the fifth set suggestive effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution ratio (20%) of the fifth set suggestive effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive presentation.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The above -mentioned notice production control means (direct control CPU120) can be different from the attitude of the notice production corresponding to the 1st display (1st production image 27TM100) and the constitution of the notice production corresponding to the second display (27 tm 200) (27 tm 200), cut -in, cut -in. Image ("Great Chance!" And "Chance!" And Characters (Character B and Character A) that appear during super reach)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the updating of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other when the specific effect ends. Common production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even after the specific performance is finished, updating of either one of the first display and the second display is continued, so that the player can feel interest in the continuation of the update of the display.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (first set suggesting effect) in which the ratio of displaying special displays (combination of [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbols) differs according to the set value,
A game machine characterized in that the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a first suggestive effect (first set suggestive effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The suggesting effect includes a second suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is "6"),
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) corresponding to the second display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Operation prompting display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350) for prompting an operation;
An operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) capable of setting the operation unit (push button 31B) in an operation promoting mode (blinking mode) to prompt the operation,
The operation prompting display means (effect control CPU 120) can display an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) corresponding to the second display,
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) while the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
Provided with a performance device which is operable when the specified performance is not executed and which is inoperable when the specified performance is executed (in the case of the variation pattern not involving the split performance, it is possible to decide to execute the performance using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B, but in the case of the variation pattern involving the division performance, it is impossible to decide to execute the performance using the device which changes the mode of the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Related information display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300 is displayed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], but the movable object effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
An image display means (effect control CPU 120) having a display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of parallax image display (stereoscopic image) in which a right eye image and a left eye image are alternately arranged in a horizontal direction, and a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) provided in front of the display body for preventing the player's left eye from viewing the right eye image and preventing the player's right eye from viewing the left eye image,
The image display means (display control unit 123) restricts the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (does not display the stereoscopic image when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B9,
Corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display);
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display,
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in a region (first reserved display region 27TM011, active display region 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (the display mode of the pending display and the active display is not changed when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a first notice effect (one pseudo-continuous effect) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect (twice pseudo-continuous effect) in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first notice effect,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) and continues the update of the first display (first effect image 27TM100) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect),
The ratio of execution of the second notice effect corresponding to the first display is higher than the ratio of execution of the second notice effect corresponding to the second display (the first effect image 27TM100 having a long display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200 having a short display period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a constitution, the player can expect that the first display is the one where the second notice performance is executed, and that the update will be continued even after the end of the specific performance, and the interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B11,
Variable display means (CPU 103) for executing variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variation pattern), and sets the timing for ending the specific effect to one of a plurality of end timings (timing TA1 and timing TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8) corresponding to the variable display pattern.
According to such a configuration, there is no need to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern with a specific effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to gaming machines of the following means C14 to C21. Conventionally, in gaming machines, there has been a technology that allows character information of characters' lines to be displayed in different modes during execution of a super reach effect, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77592. In such a game machine, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, there is a risk that the control load for displaying the moving image will increase, or that the recognition of the character image will become difficult.

The gaming machine of means C14 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game (e.g., pachinko machine 1), and effect execution means (e.g., effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) displaying a moving image to which a character image is added; M13, etc.); moving image control means (e.g., video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling display of moving images using data in the first storage area; including a text image specified by information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information), and the character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (see, for example, FIG. 16-7).
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

The gaming machine of means C15 is
In the gaming machine according to means C14, the character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the common character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period (see, for example, FIG. 16-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The gaming machine of means C16 is
In the gaming machine according to means C14 or C15, the character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image using information common to a specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting a color field, etc.) (see, for example, FIG. 16-6).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The gaming machine of means C17 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C14 to C16, the character image control means may be capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group (for example, a text image showing "extremely hot"), and capable of changing the second component related to the specific character image at a plurality of timings (see, for example, FIG. 16-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The gaming machine of means C18 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C14 to means C17, the character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component related to the character image (see, for example, FIG. 16-4).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The gaming machine of means C19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means C14 to C18, wherein the data in the second storage area may include outline data (for example, outline font data) usable for displaying character images.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The gaming machine of means C20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means C14 to C19, and when a specific element is set as a character image constituent element (for example, when the color field is "gold"), it may be possible to display a glossy character image and add an effect image around the character image (see, for example, FIG. 16-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The gaming machine of means C22 is the gaming machine according to any one of means C15 to C21, and may be capable of displaying a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-purple, red-purple, etc.) within a predetermined range (for example, the coordinates within the character or the display time range) when a special element is set as the character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow").
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each piece of display information displayed on the image display device; It is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect determination process that is executed at the time of start winning. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a final display mode of active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of active display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of pending display; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process performed at the time of a fluctuation start. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, (H1) and (H2) are explanatory diagrams showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is executed, (I1) and (I2) are explanatory views showing a table for determining whether to execute the expectation level announcement effect, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and (J) is an explanatory view showing a second change effect. is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of . (K) is an explanatory diagram showing an established combination determination table of the expectation degree previous notice effect used when the first set suggestion effect is executed, (L) is an explanatory view showing an expected degree previous notice effect establishment combination determination table used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed, and (M) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second set suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of mini-reel information; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of effect information in a split effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding division|segmentation production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for losing; It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for big hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of starting winning a prize. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode for Movie A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode for Movie B; 4 is a time chart showing playback end timing of each movie. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a pseudo-continuous performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining effect at the time of fluctuation start in the first embodiment; FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution/non-execution determination table for a third setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fourth setting suggestion effect execution/non-execution determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a third setting suggestive effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a fourth setting suggestive effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to cut-in notice effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table for execution/non-execution of the fifth setting suggestion effect; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the fifth setting suggestion effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the second embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows a display control part. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a drawing method of three-dimensional image processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of synthesizing processing of effect images and objects; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change in which an object after compositing processing is rotated; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space; FIG. 4 is a screen diagram showing a display mode of an image projected on a virtual screen and a background image; It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided for variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 is provided for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the respective ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second reserved display area 5B for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure are provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

A first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first suspension display 25A displays the number of first suspension storage according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the number of second storage storage according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a line 19 of nails is provided on the right side of the first starting prize winning opening, and is constructed so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. As described above, the row of nails 19 for preventing the entry of the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area is provided, so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening only when the game ball is shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed operation).

In this example, a case is shown in which the game ball can win in the first start winning hole only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first start winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening only when the left hitting operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area and the row of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening only when the left hitting operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves forward and backward a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of a flow path through which game balls flow down, thereby changing a large prize opening located below the bottom member into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. A special variable winning ball device 7 executes opening control to open a big winning opening serving as a winning area by moving the bottom member backward from a closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved to a closed state in a jackpot game state which occurs when a specific display result (big winning pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for small winning and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole are provided, and as shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-like bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down is moved back and forth in the front-rear direction to change the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win. A special variable winning ball device 17 executes opening control to open a special winning opening serving as a winning area by moving the bottom member backward from a closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved to a closed state in a small winning game state generated when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B executes opening control to open the second start winning opening serving as a winning area by moving the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved to the closed state when the symbol is drawn out and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20.例文帳に追加

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in a manner slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game balls falling on the special variable winning ball device 7 move from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 when the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and fall on the variable winning ball device 6B below.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. As shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. Therefore, the game balls on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are closed. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other. Therefore, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is opened, the game ball that falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B without entering the special variable winning ball device 7 enters the second starting winning port and the game ball flows toward the special variable winning ball device 17. not. On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. In this example, the regulation pieces are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B, so that the game balls flowing down from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction are changed so that the game balls meander with the movement of the forward and backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. In this sense, it can be said that the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass (enter) the big winning hole to get the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass (enter) the special winning hole opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning hole, but more winning balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole 1 and the second starting winning hole. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the special variable prize winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special prize winning port is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special prize winning port to obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) are provided on the right side of the game area.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In the pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area, but even when the big win symbols are derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area because the state shifts to a big win game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-hand hitting operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's rotating operation of a hitting ball operating handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a first special symbol game is started by a first special symbol display device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big winning symbol, for example, "7", actual symbols differ depending on the type of big winning to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (the number of rounds and an upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and the game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special-figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating the special-figure) than in the normal state (time-saving state), and control (high open control, high-base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port is also executed by improving the probability of becoming a “permanent hit” in the general game than in the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state and the high base state are continued until any one of end conditions such as execution of a special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big winning game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after turning on the power, such as when the system is reset).

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big winning symbol, for example, '7', the actual symbol differs depending on the type of big winning, which will be described later)) is stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a 'big win', and when a predetermined special symbol different from the big winning pattern (a small winning pattern, for example, '2') is stopped and displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, it may be performed by outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or turning on/off the frame LED 9, operating the movable body 32, and the like.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started corresponding to the start of the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the big win types (big hit type of the big win game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also referred to as "non-ready-to-lose") of the non-ready-to-win combinations may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). Further, when the display result is ``losing'', after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called ``ready-to-lose''), which is not a big hit combination, may be stop-displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is ``ready-to-lose'').

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high-probability state and the low-probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small-win game state and after the end of the big-win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24)), and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the large winning gate door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning gate.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and an LED signal (a signal that designates the lighting/lighting-out mode of the LED) to the LED control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. Based on the LED signal, the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are driven, and the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on/off in a manner specified by the LED signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may execute sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of a sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later.

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, a performance control command designating the backed-up game state before power interruption, or a performance control command designating the display result of the special game being executed when the special game is being executed may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the performance control command specifying the restoration time from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the power interruption has been restored or is being restored from the power interruption. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine, is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a starting prize to the first starting prize winning port occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including big win type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored in a first reserve storage buffer provided in a RAM 102 as reserve information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After the reservation information and the first reservation memory number are stored, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating the determination result such as generation of start winning, first reservation memory number, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to the performance control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the first special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big winning symbol, a small winning symbol and a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". This first variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, processing of measuring elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the first special symbol variation processing is terminated.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, when the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed and the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variation display of the second special symbol may result in a small win and may be controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small winning game is in progress (specifically, determines whether the value of the second special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the second small winning opening preprocessing to the second small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing, and if not in the small winning game, the second The value of the 1 special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next 1st special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary may be interrupted (updating of the timer is interrupted).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special pattern is interrupted in the normal state, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special pattern becomes long, and when the difference between the execution period of the variable display of the first special pattern and the interruption period becomes large, the interruption period needs to be absorbed by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in a performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period may be shortened compared to the second KT state. On the other hand, in the second KT state, a game ball can easily win a prize in the small winning control, and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed. In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". The first special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state is controlled, and when the number cut is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is "4". In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 . When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first big hit opening preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". This first big winning pre-opening process includes a setting process for starting the execution of a round in a big winning game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the display result is ``big winning''. When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The first big hit opening process in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". The processing during the opening of the first big prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7", and the processing during the opening of the first big winning prize is finished.

The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". This first big winning opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of times of execution of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit number of times of execution, processing of setting for terminating the big winning game state when the number of times of executing the round reaches the upper limit number of times of execution, and the like. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the first special process flag is updated to "6", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the first special process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first big hit post-opening process ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control, KT control and high base control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot ending process ends.

The first small hit opening preprocessing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". This first small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting to open the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit opening pre-processing ends.

The process during the opening of the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". The processing during the opening of the first small prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after the special winning port is opened and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. The value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11" when the special winning hole is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, and the processing during the opening of the first small winning is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small winning end processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, when the second special symbol variation process is started and the second special symbol is being displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol may result in a small win and may be controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small winning game is in progress (specifically, determines whether the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the first small winning opening pre-processing to the first small winning end processing), and if it is in the small winning game, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing, and if it is not in the small winning game, the second The value of the 2 special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special pattern is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special pattern, and the variable display of the second special pattern is resumed after the small winning game is finished. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to vary may be interrupted (updating of the timer is interrupted).

Incidentally, regarding the small-hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small-hit fanfare period and the small-hit ending period may be varied according to the game state.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative luminous bodies such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and to output a command (electrical signal) to the LED control board 14 to turn on the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/lighting/blinking. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read out from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when a command designating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and a waiting time for receiving the command elapses, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, an production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. In the small winning middle performance processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small winning game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small winning ending performance, and the small winning middle performance processing is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and executes various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving, for example, a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 8-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 is connected to the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 8-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in the board case 21TM201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in a special game, a function of inputting signals from switches or the like arranged at predetermined positions, a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, and a function of outputting various information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 also has a function of controlling variable display of predetermined display symbols, such as controlling the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of the respective LEDs (for example, segment LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 by performing lighting/extinguishing/coloring control of the normal symbol display device 20.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 also has a function of displaying various prize winning information. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 is equipped with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as a switch circuit 110 for taking in various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal and transmitting them to the game control microcomputer 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

8-3, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main substrate 11 . Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the front when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) tallies the number of game balls entering each winning hole (large winning hole, second starting winning hole, first starting winning hole, first to fourth general winning holes, hereinafter also referred to as "entering area"), and displays various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios based on the counting on the display monitor 21TM029. You can check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios later. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, are provided on the lower right side of the back of the power board. A store clerk or the like of the game parlor operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037 and the like is supplied with a predetermined operating voltage. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened, and can be operated only by a store clerk possessing a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key, but it may be a switch that can perform the switching operation and also perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation).

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the staff of the game arcade or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game parlor clerk or the like has to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so it is possible to prevent the game parlor or the like from leaving the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, there is provided a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has entered each winning hole or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. In the nozzle, a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting the game ball discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting the game ball that has been shot) is provided. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, etc. constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main substrate 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is connected to a game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 having a game machine frame open sensor for detecting opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2 and a door frame open sensor for detecting opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable. It also has functions. The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, ie, so-called ball bite. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 stops the ball payout process when the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball is out or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the ball is full.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low level full tank signal to the shooting board 21TM090 to stop the ball shooting from the ball shooting device. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 and serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 exchange (transmit and receive) signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second) in order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) notifying that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by adding specific data to the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, specific data is exchanged between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and transmits the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball payout by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the received ACK signal with the setting to the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a prescribed error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, ball running out, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing prescribed bits of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. - 特許庁

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal board (including the frame external terminal board and the board external terminal board) 21TM160 via the output port 21TM372b. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing to turn on/off is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050 from the interface board 21TM066 in accordance with the operation of the player. Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are transmitted and received through the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 8-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the trailing edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drops the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC 24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, thereby preventing a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage from being supplied to the card unit 21TM050.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, when the variable special symbol designating buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability of winning the big hit is lower (1/300) than when the setting values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", It is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/235) than when it is "4". When the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F) when the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether to make a big win means to decide whether to control to a big win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether to make a stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not a big hit is to be made. However, the big hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value. FIGS. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Fig. 8-5 (1) shows an example in which a "sunny" mode ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, Fig. 8-5 (2) shows an example in which a "cloudy" mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen, and Fig. 8-5 (3) shows an example in which a "rainy" mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen. FIG. 8-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

CPU103 has transmitted the setting command which designates the setting value to CPU120 for production control. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is ended. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on a performance control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, characters (characters of "BONUS end") for notifying the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed on the image display device 5 as well as an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the stored set values.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5 (4), if the configuration specified by the configuration command is "1,2" or "3,4" or "5,6", the form of a suggestion of setting suggestions is determined to be a "sunny" embodiment shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), respectively. The judgment value in the case of determined in a manner, and when the "rain" embodiment shown in FIG. 8-5 (3) is determined.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%), decides to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (for example, 40%), and "rainy" shown in (3) at a medium rate (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute a mode setting suggestion effect (ending effect). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%), determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and executes the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (3) at a medium rate (for example, 30%). It is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a high rate (eg 50%), decides to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (eg 20%), and executes the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (eg 30%) in the "rainy" mode shown in (3). It is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of

Thus, by making the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggesting performance different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in the mode in which the setting suggesting performance is executed, and the interest of the setting suggesting performance can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending performance executed when the jackpot game state ends, and especially expects the ending performance to be executed in the ``sunny'' mode.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5 (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. Setting value 0 in this example corresponds to setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, setting value 1 in this example corresponds to setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, setting value 2 in this example corresponds to setting value 3 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value (0 in this example) with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of game state), and when the value is 1, it indicates that it is decided to execute RAM clear. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or may be performed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated as described later.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, and when it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the window frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 outputs to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected (that is, if the game control microcomputer 100 is equipped with the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100, upon input of these detection signals, The open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES at step S21TM4010), the setting value is a normal value (YES at step S21TM4020), and no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S2). YES in 1TM4070), the setting value can be changed and/or confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to set a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state; and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the judgment processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, it can shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed. In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, as will be described later, under the condition that the RAM clear flag is set based on (3) that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES).

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the setting value is provided on the back side of the game board 2 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is a possibility that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that the set value is being checked or changed by some illegal means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of setting values in such a state, in this embodiment, when the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled neither in the setting confirmation mode nor in the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, control proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Also, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is damaged, NO is determined in step S21TM4010, and the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. Further, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), but the normal values (0 to 5) are not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) are satisfied, and the setting change mode is controlled. . Also, if the setting change mode was set when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140, which will be described later).

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, if both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, and if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), step S21TM4140. When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in ON state (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command indicating that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal to the effect control CPU 120 without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, display the message "There is a possibility that the set value is abnormal." Further, the effect control CPU 120 makes the image display device 5 temporarily turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned off), and then, when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), shifts to a setting change mode and performs an operation for changing the set value (fixes the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029. not being done" (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.).

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, it is possible to specify the possibility that a predetermined event (in this example, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not started despite the possibility that the setting value is not a regular value (0 to 5)) has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer.

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the result of checking the data in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if the power is interrupted during the setting change (that is, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and it is determined as YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state, and the normal game should not be played. Before proceeding to technique processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), three conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, it is possible to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not established, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area cannot be fixed to a regular value, and the normal game processing cannot be started. Therefore, if NO is determined in any one of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the above-described loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. Therefore, the game arcade clerk or the like must turn off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. In this way, when the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is temporarily turned off, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all satisfied when the power is turned on next time to shift to the setting change mode and fix the set value in the set value storage area to the normal value.

Incidentally, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to emit light in a predetermined power-off instruction mode, thereby prompting the power source to be turned off.

In the present embodiment, if the setting change flag is not set (NO at step S21TM4030), two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070), in order to set a state in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). .

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), even if two conditions are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) when it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO) in step S21TM4140, the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) (step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0" with the lowest jackpot probability as the normal value in the set value storage area (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power supply interruption processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power interruption signal based on power interruption including unexpected power interruption is input, and when the power interruption signal is input, executes the power supply interruption processing immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the interruption of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620, or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the store clerk of the game parlor usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the store clerk of the game parlor may mistakenly recognize the actual set value. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the setting value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the setting value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM is not cleared after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command designating that the setting confirmation mode is set (step S21TM4650), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, if the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, or when the power was cut off last time), the set value stored in the set value storage area is 3, then the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed to 4→5→6→1→2→3→4. will be updated in this order.

Here, the current configuration value display (step S21TM4550) and security signal output (step S21TM4560), and transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but transmission of the setting mode command (step S21TM4590) and the set value. If the new (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed, it is equivalent to the settings confirmation mode that can be confirmed or cannot change the set value. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the state in which it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output the security signal (step S21TM4560), as well as to execute the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or S21TM4150). control).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 may set a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag which can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off, and may clear the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 may set a setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off, and may clear the setting change mode command transmission flag when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a 4 ms wait is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when shifting to the normal game processing. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is executed as a common process regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (without determining which mode the control is in). Further, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also executed as a common process regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (without determining which mode the control is in). In this way, the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control, thereby simplifying the security signal output control and reducing the control load.

In addition, by starting the output of the security signal in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and by stopping the output of the security signal in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode control is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer for both the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. However, if both the security signal output start control and the output end control are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, it becomes difficult for the external device to grasp in which mode the control is performed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the value of the security signal timer is temporarily set to 1000 ms in step S21TM4710, and then, based on the judgment of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the value of the security signal timer is reset to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM. (overwrite). That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is temporarily set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), the final output stop timing of the security signal is the timing when 1 sec has passed since the setting confirmation mode was terminated when the setting confirmation mode was controlled, and the timing when 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode has been terminated when the setting change mode was controlled.

Specifically, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), in the game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after the interruption is permitted, the output of the security signal continues until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and when it is controlled in the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds) , in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted, the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 30000 ms. In the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the security signal timer is kept from a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) to 0 ms, so that the output of the security signal is continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing may be performed.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control in the setting change mode is finished. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is possible to estimate that the initialization process may have been executed and the setting change mode was controlled.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic anomaly is detected by the anomaly detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by initialization processing) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, since the RAM is not cleared, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output processing, and the security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (whether or not an abnormality was detected at the time of power failure).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second, but the configuration is not limited to such a form, and the value of the security signal timer that is set first after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be at least a period that allows the external device to recognize that the security signal has been output, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set at the time of power restoration (NO in step S21TM4030) when power failure occurs thereafter.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the setting value as 1 to 6, and if the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the image display device 5 on the CPU 120 side for performance control, the player may misunderstand the setting value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6) on the side of the performance control CPU 120, and the performance suggesting the setting value is executed within the range of the setting value 1 to 6.

In addition, not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area in the setting command, and may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the performance control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or by executing the performance suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command, the setting values can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), there is no power interruption during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 2 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040).

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal at the time of power-on, and after permitting the interruption, the game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) may be shifted to. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 does not execute RAM clearing based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, and transmits a backup command as a command at the time of power failure recovery, and shifts to normal game processing.

A performance control CPU 120 recognizes that recovery from power interruption has been performed (RAM clearing has not been performed) based on data at the time of power supply stop based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, it is possible to notify that the power supply has been restored (RAM is not cleared) based on the data at the time of power supply stop.

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is decided to execute RAM clear.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds, and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special pattern process flag, variable probability flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) indicating the game state before power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area storing each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for judging normal per symbol) is initialized to 0, but it may be initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that: (a) if the setting change mode was not controlled, the normal value was stored in the setting value storage area when the power was turned on (YES in step S21TM4020); 21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, for example, initial values are set to flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a normal symbol hit determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, and a special symbol process flag.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the later-described game control timer interrupt processing, big hit determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). A performance control CPU 120 recognizes that initialization processing has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command (RAM clearing has been performed without recovery from power interruption based on data at the time of power supply stop). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, it is possible to notify that the game state etc. has been initialized (the RAM has been cleared without recovering from power interruption based on the data at the time of power supply stop).

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clearing. Further, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear without executing step S21TM4710 (without setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer remains 1 second set in step S21TM4710.

At this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0.

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed, and the process shifts to the normal game process. In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and the random number for determining whether or not it is a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit, and the random number update process for display is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the random number for display. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value of a counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit. In the game control process for controlling the progress of the game described later (the process in which the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself, or the processing in which a command signal is sent to cause another microcomputer to control, or the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one cycle (between the minimum value and the maximum value of the normal per symbol determination random number) ), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) at step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 shifts to the processing at the time of power failure recovery without confirming whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). If it is determined that the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in a closed state (according to the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the power recovery process.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 proceeds to the power-on processing (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) without confirming whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (irrespective of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). If it is determined at 4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the power-on processing (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be performed.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode and initializing the game state (executing RAM clear). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode and not to initialize the game state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). As described above, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like.

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was cut off, so the setting value is in an unstable state, and there is a possibility that the setting value to be determined on the game parlor side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and enables control to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and outputs a security signal in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (game control timer interrupt processing is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, it is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode at the time of power failure.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) and the game stop state (step S21TM4190) when the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) are not satisfied based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). 1TM4200 to step S21TM4220), an error display is performed on the display monitor 21TM029 by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIGS. 8-10, each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029 displays the letter "E", thereby clearly notifying the amusement arcade clerk of the occurrence of an abnormality (that the power may have been cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays on the image display device 5 a message "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." to make a notification).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are met, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on. If it is determined to be in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), it is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode") is not performed either.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) can notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, that the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "Setting change mode is in progress" or a message "Please perform setting change operation to change the setting value". Thus, a store clerk or the like of the game parlor can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and after changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the planned setting value by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing by switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, if the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, if any of the above conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied, the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after transmitting the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) without being controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode") will also be performed.

In this way, when an error is displayed on the main board 11 (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) and a message is also displayed on the performance control board 12 ("After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode"), it is informed that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode have not been met as the state of the game machine even though the power has been cut off during the setting change mode after the power is restored. . In this case, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again after operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to a planned set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to an OFF state to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to normal game processing.

In this way, when a power failure occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a), when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration, the error display on the main substrate 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is automatically shifted to the setting change mode, and unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b), when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, even though the power has been cut off during the setting change mode, the state cannot shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored. become. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating the possibility that the setting value may be abnormal depending on whether all of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied and when any of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) are not satisfied.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal and a command indicating that the mode has been transitioned to the setting change mode (or that the condition for transition is satisfied) is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command should cause the image display device 5 to display a message that "the set value may be abnormal" and a message that "it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode". On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (turned from the OFF state to the ON state). In response to the change from the F state to the ON state, a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, the performance control board 12 (the performance control CPU 120) can specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and notify that effect, despite being controlled neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Thus, a store clerk or the like in a game parlor can clearly grasp that an operation for changing a set value has been performed in spite of being controlled neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, and can confirm whether or not any illegality has been carried out.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, it is possible not to transmit the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command without confirming whether the lock switch 21TM051 is operated and whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. In this way, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced by not confirming the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value during the period when the normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES at step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON. state (YES in step S21TM4140), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode is entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 8-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without checking whether the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

In the processing shown in FIG. 8-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM415) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. 0), is controlled to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570), and is not controlled to the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), which differs from the processing shown in FIG. 8-6. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is shifted to, and the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power is cut off during the setting change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), control is made to the setting change mode based on the fact that three conditions are satisfied: (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, control is forcibly set to the setting change mode.

In this way, when power is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored, the setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether or not the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, thereby improving workability for fixing the set values.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is set. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed (steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determination of YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk of the amusement arcade who performed the change operation of the setting value changes the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state to the ON state and then switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determines YES in step S21TM4680) in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode.

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is made different between when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). It is designed to shift to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), notification may be made to prompt the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (performs the processing corresponding to step S21TM4190 described above). Please switch to OFF after changing the value." may be displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installing it in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 cannot be played unless the game hall side changes the set value through the setting change mode and terminates the setting change mode. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to fix the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is entered. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the random number for judging a big win extracted at the time of start-up before the setting change is judged to be a big win in relation to the set value before the change, but is judged to be lost in relation to the set value after the change, or conversely, an event may occur in which it is judged to be a miss in relation to the set value before the change but judged to be a big win in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, it is inappropriate to continue the game after setting change based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the start winning before the setting change (execute timer interrupt processing for game control including special symbol process processing), so that the reserved memory (special symbol reserved memory, ordinary symbol reserved memory) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of reserved memories is set to the initial value (0).

In addition, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission of step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switch processing (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) in the game control timer interruption processing is not performed, and starting winning, gate passage, etc. are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like are not yet executed during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, and the random number is not updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period controlled in the setting change mode, the random number will be the same regardless of the timing of the start winning, and it is inappropriate to progress the game based on such a random number, so the start winning and gate passage are invalidated.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control in the case where a power failure occurs during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, the control when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends) will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in sequence 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and "1" obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in sequence 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting change flag is set, so when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or even if the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically set. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and power is cut without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), when the power is restored, the setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, there are cases where the planned set values have already been set, and in this case, the clerk of the game parlor can terminate the setting change mode and shift the game machine to normal game processing without performing the operation of changing the set values again, so that workability can be improved.

Next, the control in the case where a power failure occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the set value during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in sequence 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and (2), in both the case where the power is interrupted while the control is in the setting change mode and the case where the power supply is interrupted after the control in the setting change mode is terminated, when the power is restored, the setting values changed according to the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, i.e., the setting values stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power interruption are effective setting values (the setting values stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the control is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated while the setting change mode is being controlled, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state). The setting value stored in the information temporary storage area may be stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to determine the setting value. In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also change according to the change in the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area.

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled upon power-on and a setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), if the operation for terminating the setting change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and power is cut off, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 will not be changed from when the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). not In other words, in the power supply stop state, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are continuously held. Therefore, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine in which a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided and the jackpot probability differs according to the setting value. There is.

In addition, the following inventions are disclosed in this characterizing portion 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
Specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal in step S21TM4560) for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode;
setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (security signal timer value) relating to the period in which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (sets 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (continues to output the security signal until 1 second has passed since the setting confirmation mode ended, and continues to output the security signal until 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode ends with the end of the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value (when RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465);
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (continues to output the security signal until 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode was ended with the end of the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output for at least the period corresponding to the predetermined value in both cases when the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode are finished, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to set different output periods for the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting processing by the setting means.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without a specific operation (detection of turning off of the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) for terminating the setting change mode, the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing the specific information (the setting change flag) is set based on the transition to the setting change mode in step S21TM4580, and the setting change mode is terminated. Equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on this,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680), a specific information storage means for storing specific information (in the backup area of the RAM 102, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and step S21TM4580 is performed based on the end of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at S21TM4720,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), it is possible for the display means to execute error notification and to transmit an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormal error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190, and the display monitor 21TM displays an error in step S21TM4210. 029 can display the letter "E"),
The effect control means, in response to receiving the error command, performs a notification prompting an operation for changing the setting value (displays a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode").
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means P1 to means P4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that appropriately notifies the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (a game control microcomputer 100 that sets a setting change flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode and clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode),
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
It is further provided with an error notification means (game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied) capable of executing error notification when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting change flag is set).
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means is capable of controlling the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 when the power is turned on) based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied. , the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the unnecessary error notification can be avoided and the change of the set value can be properly urged.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the power supply is turned on, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied (NO in any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
and the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the error notification is executed by the display means and an error command is transmitted to the effect control means (the set value abnormal error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190, and the error command is transmitted to the display monitor 21 in the error display of step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on TM029),
The effect control means, in response to receiving the error command, performs a notification prompting an operation for changing the setting value (displays a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode").
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set values. The invention according to means Q1 to Q5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (a game control microcomputer 100 that sets a setting change flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode and clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode),
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
The setting change mode control means controls to the setting change mode when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. automatically control to the setting change mode regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state.
The gaming machine of means Q1 may further include initialization means for initializing the game state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
If the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started, the setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on the establishment of the setting change condition (if the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (cleared). RAM clearing is executed after the setting change mode is terminated by switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state), and if the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change mode is controlled regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is set). automatically control to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored, the setting change mode is controlled even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, so that the workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power supply is turned on, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state); the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and the setting change mode can be terminated based on a specific operation during control to the setting change mode (it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled in the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), erases the specific information when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (clears the setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends),
When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode control means controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether the transition operation is performed when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied), and switches the setting change mode based on the specific operation. Terminate (Terminate the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the change operation when being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610, changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area);
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (ends the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed in the setting change mode, the setting value storage means continuously stores the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting change mode (the setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed, so the power is turned off during the setting change mode. (The setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the control according to the set value is executed, so that workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.),
The setting change mode control means changes the setting values stored in the setting value storage means based on a change operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, changes only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area instead of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and terminates the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode). When it is confirmed that F is reached, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area, and the setting value is confirmed as a valid setting value, and the setting change mode is terminated.
The set value storage means stores the set value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value itself stored in the setting value storage area is not changed unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. (In this case, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and (B1) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of pending display and active display in this embodiment. The pending display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that have not been executed, and the active display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that are being executed. In this embodiment, a first reserved display area 16TM011 in which a first reserved memory number (first reserved display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and an active display area 16TM013 in which an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed is provided at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state), a mini-slot 16TM030, which will be described later, is displayed in a special effect area 16TM035 provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5 and below the active display 16TM003. In this example, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini-slot 16TM030 as if it were the base of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at the position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the mini-slot 16TM030 will execute the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed.

In this embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 is information that can be displayed regardless of whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed (whether or not variable display of decorative symbols is being executed) and regardless of the number of reserved memories.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 16TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 16TM011. That is, the first pending display 16TM001 is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning port) is satisfied but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not satisfied. When a plurality of first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011, the start condition of the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 16TM001 is established in the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (in order from the right as seen from the player).

The effect control CPU 120 displays an active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 is information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols (and the variable display of the decorative symbols) in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the reserved memory number is not 0) is established after the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is established.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the areas in the upper center of the image display device 5 where the decorative symbols are variably displayed and statically displayed are, from the left, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern, which is displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, is a special pattern. A pattern indicating whether or not the special pattern is variably displayed and a display result of the special pattern is referred to as a small pattern. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. The upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped, is defined as a small pattern display area 5l, a small pattern display area 5c, and a small pattern display area 5r from the left. The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), in this embodiment, when it is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first variable mini-slot display to be described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), the mini-slot symbols "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "7", and "Blank" are variably displayed. In the second variable mini-slot display to be described later, as shown in FIG. "CE", "Extreme heat", and "FEVER" mini-slot symbols are variably displayed.

(first mini slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is controlled, each time the special symbol variable display (decorative symbol variable display, small symbol variable display) is executed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (areas corresponding to the three reels in the slot machine), which are divided into "left", "middle", and "right", are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower). A first mini-slot variable display (scrolling direction or updating display) can be performed. In the first variable display of mini-slots, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one row (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" simply means variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to variable display of special symbols, or variable display of small symbols.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (3 reels), a plurality of mutually identifiable symbols such as "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)" are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, and a combination of symbols called a winning combination is completed, the winning combination is established. The winning hand may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination of different symbols. Successful hands in this embodiment are a combination of identical symbols and a combination of different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "lost".

In this embodiment, the winning combination is established when the same symbols are combined. For example, when the same symbol combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] is arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of "Bell" is established. Similarly, when the same pattern combination of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is completed, the combination of "watermelon" is established, and when the combination of the same symbols of [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] is completed, the combination of "cherry" is completed, and when the combination of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is completed, the combination of "7 matching" is established. However, when the combination of the same symbols of [Blank], [Blank], and [Blank] are arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, it is handled in the same way as when the winning combination is "lost".

(Second mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first variable mini-slot display is executed (after any of the above-described winning hands are established), the second variable mini-slot display can be executed in which the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (an area corresponding to one reel) that is not divided into a plurality of areas. In the second mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), a plurality of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "no display", "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER" are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In this embodiment, the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, i.e., the displayed characters, suggests that the display result of the executed special symbol variable display (display result of the executed decorative symbol variable display) will be a "big hit".

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the variation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the variation number counter that counts the number of variation displays executed after the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is displayed at the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variable count display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variable displays performed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), "125" is displayed as the variable count display 16TM040, indicating that 124 variable displays have already been executed since the game state shifted to the normal state, and the 125th variable display is currently being executed.

Here, the change count display 16TM040 changes from a normal mode (for example, white mode) to a setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) different from the normal mode by executing a second setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the setting value of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that, based on the display result of the variation display 16TM040 to be executed, a notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expectation notice effect) may be executed in which the display mode is changed from the normal mode (e.g., white mode) to an expectation level notice mode (e.g., red mode) that is different from the normal mode and the above-described setting suggestion mode (e.g., purple mode). However, in the same variable display, both the second setting suggestion performance and the second expectation level advance notice performance are not executed, and when it is decided to carry out the second setting suggestion performance, the second expectation level advance notice performance is not executed in the variable display. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation degree announcement effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of start winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process at the time of start winning shown in FIG.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command) based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning opening have been newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not the big hit will be determined among the results of determination at the time of winning. A CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of a big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging a big win and the random number for judging a kind of a big win extracted at the time of start winning, and outputs a pattern designating command designating the judgment result. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether normal reach or super reach is obtained based on the random number for determining the type of variation pattern extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command designating the determination result. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of starting winning commands (symbol designating command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designating command) is newly stored in the starting winning command storage area. If a new set of starting winning commands has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process is terminated.

If one set of start winning commands is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) (step S16TM1010). It should be noted that the final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, there are cases where the notice characters are superimposed on the active display in response to execution of the expectation level notice effect described later. In other words, there is a possibility that the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of starting winning may change from the final display mode of the active display based on the effect determination process at the start of the variation.

FIG. 9-3A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003, any one of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white circular display) at a rate of 70%, the blue mode (blue circular display) at a rate of 25%, and the red mode at a rate of 5%. (red circle display).

On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) becomes the normal mode at a rate of 10%, the blue mode at a rate of 30%, and the red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change pattern, and whether or not the first change effect is executed and the number of times of execution, based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-3(B)) (step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 001 to 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start win (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 70% for the change pattern 001 and selected with a probability of 25% for the change pattern 002. Judgment values are assigned so that 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the pattern designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned determination values such that change pattern 001 is selected with a probability of 10%, change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 30%, and change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 60%. .

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the starting prize is generated, but when the display mode of the active display during the active shift is different from the final display mode, the active change performance for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the first change effect suggesting the possibility of changing the display mode of the active display can be executed. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode, and in the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed. Also, the first change effect is a effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change performance of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change performance of the failure mode is executed, the character acts on the active display but does not change the display mode of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the active display in the active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 27%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 23%, the variation pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 10%, the variation pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 5%, and the variation pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the changing pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the changing pattern 011, selected with a probability of 10% for the changing pattern 012, selected with a probability of 15% for the changing pattern 013, and selected for the changing pattern 014 with 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 013 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 015 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed after the first change effect of the success mode is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), when the active display in the active shift is in a red mode, and (1) the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 35%, and the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the variation pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the pattern designation command is "big win"), the changing pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the changing pattern 021, selected with a probability of 15% for the changing pattern 022, selected with a probability of 30% for the changing pattern 023, and selected for the changing pattern 024 with a probability of 25. The decision values are assigned so that the pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 024 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 025 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pending display change pattern based on the pending display change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 9-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and ends the process as it is.

FIG. 9-4(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the change pattern of the pending display for one pending item when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "1". In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the determination value is allocated so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100% as the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize (new first reserved memory). On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display during the active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a determination value so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display during the active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a determination value so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9-4, the active shift means that the first reserved display 16TM001 shifts from the first reserved display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed).

In this embodiment, the display mode is not changed when the first reserved display 16TM001 shifts from the first reserved display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013. That is, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift matches the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift, but the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 may be changed during the active shift.

FIG. 9-4 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the change pattern of the pending display for two pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "2". In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of the active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a determination value so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display in the active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start win (new first hold memory) is such that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. is assigned a judgment value. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the pattern designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the changing pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the changing pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display during the active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the variation pattern of the first suspension display corresponding to the variation display based on the start winning (new first suspension memory) is selected with a probability of 10%, and the variation pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the changing pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the changing pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the changing pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 10%. It is

FIG. 9-4 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the change pattern of the pending display for three pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "3". In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 301 to 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a determination value so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display in the active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start win (new first hold memory) is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the pattern designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the changing pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the changing pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the changing pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 20%. It is

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display in the active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start win (new first hold memory) is selected with a probability of 13%, and the change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the changing pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 20%, a changing pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 20%, a changing pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 30%, and a changing pattern 308 is selected. is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the variation pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4 (F) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the change pattern of the pending display for four pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "4". In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a determination value so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is assigned a decision value so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display in the active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20% and the variation pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big win"), the changing pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) is selected with a probability of 30%, a changing pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 30%, a changing pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 30%, and a changing pattern 405 is selected. A judgment value is assigned so that is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display in the active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start win (new first hold memory) is selected with a probability of 3%, and the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%. 408 is selected with a 3% probability, the variation pattern 409 is selected with a 10% probability, the variation pattern 410 is selected with a 10% probability, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a 10% probability, the variation pattern 412 is selected with a 15% probability, the variation pattern 413 is selected with a 15% probability, the variation pattern 414 is selected with a 15% probability, and the variation pattern 415 is selected with a 16% probability. are On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (that is, when the determination result specified by the pattern designation command is "big win"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first pending memory) is selected with a probability of 10%, a changing pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, a changing pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%, and a changing pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%. is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 7%, the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the variation pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
A CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command designating a variation pattern, and a reservation memory number subtraction designation command (a first reservation memory number subtraction designation command or a second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) to a performance control CPU 120 when starting variable display of special symbols.

When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reservation memory number subtraction designation command or second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the number of reservations has been subtracted, the display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect content (Reach and pseudo consecutive etc.) A variation pattern that designates. Based on the reception of a set of commands called designated commands from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify that the variable display of the special symbols is executed and the variable time of the special symbols and the performance contents (reach, pseudo-run, etc.).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is terminated and the display result is derived based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated and the display result is determined.

FIG. 9-5 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the production control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) for executing the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols based on the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command The production to be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the designated fluctuation pattern is started. Determined by the time effect determination process.

First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the execution/non-execution determination table for first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-6(G)) (step S16TM2000).

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. This first setting suggesting performance is a performance of establishing the role of ``Bell'' by stop-displaying a combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell] and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. That is, the player recognizes that the first setting suggesting performance for suggesting the set value is executed based on the stop display of the combination of the mini-slot patterns of [Bell], [Bell] and [Bell] in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6(G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and decides to execute it at a rate of 3%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96% and to execute it at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95% and to execute it at a rate of 5%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94% and to execute it at a rate of 6%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and to execute it at a rate of 7%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92% and to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. In this embodiment, since the process of determining the effect at the time of starting the variation is executed each time the variable display is performed, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the above-mentioned first mini-slot variable display is [Bell] or "Loss". Thus, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggesting performance is executed each time the variable display is executed, and also becomes interested in the number of times the first set suggesting performance is executed with respect to the number of times the variable display is executed (execution ratio of the first set suggesting performance). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to guess the set value for each variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestive effect (YES in step S16TM2010), it determines whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed based on the expectation level advance notice effect execution/non-execution determination table 1 (see FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2)) selected when executing the first set suggestive effect (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120 which will be described later.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). In addition, when the variation pattern is "no normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100%. Also, when the variation pattern is ``missing super reach'' (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 60% and to execute it at a rate of 40%.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "big hit". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "normal reach big hit" (variation time is 30 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is ``super ready-to-win jackpot'' (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 20% and to execute it at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time). In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, if the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach big hit (30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 100%, and if the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach loss (120 seconds), the expectation level announcement effect is executed at a rate of 40%. In the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80%.

When a variation pattern with a short variation time (non-reach failure (10 seconds), normal reach failure (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, a sufficient period for executing both performances of the first setting suggestive performance and the expectation level advance notice performance is not ensured. Therefore, when the variation display based on the variation pattern with a short variation time is executed, although the first setting suggestion performance can be executed, the expectation level announcement performance is not executed after the first setting suggestion performance is executed.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a long variation time (loss of super reach (120 seconds), big win of super reach (120 seconds)) is selected, a sufficient period for executing both performances of the first setting suggestive performance and the expectation level notice performance is ensured. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree announcement effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestive performance is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the variable time, and the first set suggestive performance is executed at a common rate regardless of whether the variable time is short or long. On the other hand, the expectation level announcement effect is executed at a higher rate when the variable time is long than when the variable time is short. That is, when the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is short, the [ratio of execution of the expectation level announcement performance after the execution of the first set suggestion performance] is higher than the [ratio of execution of the expectation level announcement performance after the first setting suggestion performance is executed] when the fluctuation time of the variation display to be executed is long.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation level announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2030), it determines the display result to be stopped and displayed in the second variable mini-slot display and whether or not to execute the second change effect based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on "a character pattern as a display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. In this embodiment, the second change performance is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display becomes the display result of "no display" in which the character pattern is not displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

FIG. 9-6(J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, it is possible to decide one of "no display", which is a display result in which the character symbols are not displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, and "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER", which are character symbols, and judgment values are assigned to each of these display results.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), when the display result of the variable display is "no" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "no"), as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display executed in the variable display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANCE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "hot heat" is selected at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), the display result of the second mini-slot variable display executed in the variable display is "no display" at a rate of 22%, "CHANCE" at a rate of 35%, "great heat" at a rate of 40%, and "FEVER" at a rate of 3%. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of the big win is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), regarding the display results of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on one reel), the expectation for a big hit is high in the order of "no display"<"CHANCE"<"hot heat"<"FEVER". Therefore, when any character pattern of ``CHANCE'', ``rapid heat'', and ``FEVER'' stops (when the second change performance is executed after that), the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when none of the character patterns stop and the display result becomes ``no display'' (when the second change performance is not executed after that). In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the character pattern to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In this embodiment, when the character pattern (either of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", and "FEVER") stops as a result of the display of the second mini-slot variable display, the second change effect of changing the display mode of the active display is executed. Specifically, in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (reel 1) of the mini-slot 16TM030, when any one of the character symbols "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu" and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed, (i) the stopped-displayed character symbol moves upward from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (FIG. 9-10 (11)). ), (ii) the active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon showing the same characters as the character pattern that resulted in the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character pattern resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a successful combination of the expectation level announcement effect based on the expectation level announcement effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7(K)) used when executing the first set suggestion effect (step S16TM2050), and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 1 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect, the winning role of the expectation level advance notice effect, more specifically, the role of establishing the first variable mini-slot display executed in the expectation level advance notice effect (same applies hereinafter) are "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", "cherry (freeze)", "7 match", and "7 match (freeze)". , and a judgment value is assigned to each of these established hands.

In the present embodiment, when "lost" is selected as the establishment combination of the expectation level notice performance, mini-slot symbols of combinations including different symbols are stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. For example, when [Replay] is stop-displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5C1, and [Bell] is stopped in the mini-slot pattern display area 5R1, the establishment combination of the expectation level notice effect is "lost".

In this embodiment, when ``watermelon'', ``cherry'', and ``seven-matched'' are selected as establishment roles of the expectation degree announcement performance, the mini-slot patterns of the combination of the same patterns are stop-displayed in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1. For example, when a combination of mini-slot symbols [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] are stop-displayed as a combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, the establishment role of the expectation level notice performance is ``watermelon''.

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" or "cherry (via replay)" is selected as a combination to establish the expectation level notice effect, after the mini-slot symbol combinations of [replay], [replay], and [replay] are stop-displayed as combinations of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the mini-slot symbols are changed again in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, and the mini-slot symbols are changed. A combination of mini-slot patterns of [watermelon], [watermelon] and [watermelon] or a combination of mini-slot patterns of [cherry], [cherry] and [cherry] is stopped and displayed as a combination of the same patterns in pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1.

In the present embodiment, when "Cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)" is selected as the establishment combination of the expectation level notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 are variably displayed in a freeze mode different from the normal mode (scroll display or update display from top to bottom). A symbol combination or a mini-slot symbol combination of [7], [7], [7] is stopped and displayed. The variable display in the freeze mode in this embodiment is a variable display of mini-slot symbols that performs scroll display or update display from bottom to top while the visibility of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is lowered.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (symbols in which characters are not displayed) (that is, when the second change effect is not executed), the established combination in the expectation level announcement effect becomes "loss" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is "CHANCE"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "miss" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 45%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 20%, and 20%. "Cherry" at a rate of 2%, "Cherry (Via Replay)" at a rate of 2%, and "Cherry (Freeze)" at a rate of 8%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is "hot heat"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, "cherry" at a rate of 40%, and "cherry" at a rate of 10%. "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 25% of the time it becomes "Cherry (Freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is "FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation level notice effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 70% and "7 matching (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the established hand is "lost", the stop symbol (character icon) is "no display" or "CHANCE", when the established hand is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol (character icon) is "CHANCE" or "rapid heat", and when the established hand is "7 sets", the stop symbol (character icon) is "FEVER". In addition, when the winning combination is "lost", "no display" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE" as the stop symbol, when the winning combination is "watermelon", "CHANCE" is more likely to be selected as the stopping symbol (character icon) than "hot heat", and when the winning combination is "cherry", "hot heat" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE" as the stopping symbol (character icon).

That is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state with respect to the second variable display of the mini-slot is higher in the order of ``no display'' < ``CHANCE'' < ``very hot'' < ``FEVER'', and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state with respect to the established hand of the first variable display of the mini-slot is higher in the order of ``missing'' < ``watermelon'' < ``cherry'' < ``7 matching''. In addition, when ``7 matching'' is selected as the establishment combination of the first variable display of the mini-slot, the stop pattern of the second variable display of the mini-slot is always ``FEVER'', so that ``7 matching'' is a big win determination performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the established combination composed of a plurality of kinds of mini-slot symbols, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the successful combination accompanied by the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 matching (freeze)". When ``cherry (freeze)'' is selected as the established role, the display result (character icon) is ``CHANCE'' or ``very hot'', and when ``7 sets (freeze)'' is selected as the established role, the notice character (character icon) is ``FEVER''. That is, when the mini-slot patterns are variably displayed in the freeze mode, the winning combination of ``cherry'' or higher (``cherry'' or ``7 matching'') is determined, so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state is higher than when the mini-slot patterns are variably displayed in the normal mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), it determines whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed based on the expectation level announcement effect execution/non-execution determination table 2 (see FIGS. 9-6 (I1) and (I2)) selected when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is ``no normal reach'' (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 80% and to execute it at a rate of 20%. Also, when the variation pattern is ``missing super reach'' (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 40% and to execute it at a rate of 60%.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first set suggestion effect and the display result is "big hit". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement performance, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement performance is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. A CPU 120 for performance control decides not to execute the expectation degree announcement performance at a rate of 30% and to execute it at a rate of 70% when the variation pattern is ``normal reach big win'' (variation time is 30 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is ``super reach jackpot'' (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement performance at a rate of 10% and to execute it at a rate of 90%.

Here, in the examples of FIGS. 9(H1) and (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect when the “normal reach” variation pattern is selected (“no execution” becomes 100%), but in the examples of FIGS. (“With execution” is 20% for “missing normal reach” and 70% for “big hit at normal reach”).

9 (H1) and (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation level announcement effect when the "super reach" variation pattern is selected (40% for "super reach failure", 80% for "super reach big hit"), in the example of FIGS. The ratio of execution of the effect is higher (60% for "super reach lost" and 90% for "super reach big hit"). Thus, in this embodiment, when the first setting suggestion performance is not executed, the expectation degree announcement performance is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion performance is executed.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation level announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2130), it determines the display result to be stopped and displayed in the second variable mini-slot display and whether or not to execute the second change effect based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a successful combination of the expectation level announcement effect based on the expectation level announcement effect establishment combination determination table 2 (see FIG. 9-7(L)) used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed (step S16TM2150), and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 2 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7(L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestive effect, the winning role of the expectation level advance notice effect, more specifically, the role of establishing the first variable mini-slot display executed in the expectation level advance notice effect (same applies hereinafter) are "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", "cherry (freeze)", "7 match", and "7 match (freeze)". , and a judgment value is assigned to each of these established hands.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (symbols in which characters are not displayed) (that is, when the second change effect is not executed), the established combination in the expectation level notice effect becomes "loss" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is "CHANCE"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "loss" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 50%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 50%. 18% will be "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 10% will be "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is "hot heat"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, "cherry" at a rate of 10%, and "cherry" at a rate of 38%. "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 27% of the time it becomes "Cherry (Freeze)".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is "FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 30% and "7 matching (freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

In the present embodiment, there is shown an example in which the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") in the expectation level notice effect is determined based on different tables depending on whether it is decided to execute the first set suggestion effect or not to execute the first set suggestion effect. (ie, a winning combination other than "bell") for the mini-slot variable display may be determined based on a common table. That is, the presence or absence of the execution of the expectation level announcement effect may be determined at different ratios in steps S16TM2020 and S16TM2120 (based on the execution/non-execution determination table of different expectation level announcement effects), while the establishment combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation level announcement effect may be determined based on the common winning combination determination table in steps S16TM2050 and S16TM2150.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 each time the variable display is executed, and the winning combination becomes "Bell" or "Loss". Then, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is finished, there are (i) a case where the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (a case where the expectation level announcement effect is executed) and (ii) a case where the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (a case where the expectation level announcement effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree announcement performance is executed), after the established hand determined based on the established hand determination table is established, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is further executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) symbols not including characters (“no display”) or (b) character symbols (“CHANCE”, “rapid heat”, “FEVER”) are stopped. (b) When the character designs (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, “FEVER”) are stopped, a second change effect is executed in which character icons based on the character designs are added to the active display.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, even if (a) the pattern not including characters (“no display”) stops after the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, that is, even if the second variation effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the winning combination always becomes “lost”. Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the pattern not including characters ("no display") stops (when the second variation effect is not executed), (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that may establish a winning combination other than "lost".

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the pattern (“no display”) containing no characters is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed), (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) (three-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) (one-reel system) may be executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Also, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) character symbols (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, and “FEVER”) may always be stopped. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) is performed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, the second variation effect may be performed without fail. When such a performance structure is adopted, (i) the first variable display of mini-slots (second time) executed before the second variable display of mini-slots (first time) may not be "lost".

Next, when the value of the variation number counter is 25×n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a second setting suggestive effect, which will be described later, based on the second setting suggestive effect execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 9-7 (M)) (step S16TM2070), and ends the process as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is not 25×n (where n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the second setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. This second setting suggesting effect is a effect of changing the variation frequency display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the purple mode at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started. Then, when a predetermined period elapses after starting the second setting suggestion performance, the second setting suggestion performance is ended, and the change frequency display 16TM040 displayed in the purple mode in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is returned to the normal mode.

In FIG. 9-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90% and decides to execute it at a rate of 10%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88% and to execute it at a rate of 12%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and to execute it at a rate of 14%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84% and to execute it at a rate of 16%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and to execute it at a rate of 18%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level notice effect are executed. Either an effect or an expectation degree announcement effect may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game state is in the low-probability-low base state, the example is shown in which the change count display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, it is determined in step S16TM2020 or S16TM2120 whether or not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, and furthermore, in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150, the establishment combination of the expectation degree announcement effect is determined. When the first setting suggestive effect is determined in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect is determined based on the currently set value, so in this embodiment, the first setting suggestive effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time).

Further, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation degree announcement effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. When the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach failure (10 seconds), normal reach failure (30 seconds), and normal reach big hit (30 seconds), it is determined at a rate of 100% that ``expectation level announcement performance is not performed'', and when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach failure (120 seconds), it is determined at a rate of 40% that ``expectation level announcement performance is performed'', and in the case of super reach jackpot (120 seconds). , 80% of the time, it decides to “execute the expectation level announcement effect”.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), and the mini-slot symbol combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] can be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5 regardless of the variation pattern (variation time). In addition, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect can be executed, and after the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 are stopped displaying the combination of the mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell], the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 display the same symbols other than [Bell]. Combinations (eg, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.) can be statically displayed. According to such a configuration, in the mini-slot 16TM030, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value, and it is possible to execute the expectation degree announcement performance suggesting the degree of expectation that the display result will be a ``jackpot'', so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(G), the player counts the number of executions of the first set suggestive effect each time the first set suggested effect is executed, the execution ratio of which varies according to the set value, so that the player himself/herself calculates the execution ratio of the first set suggested effect [execution ratio of the first set suggested effect = (the number of executions of the first set suggested effect/the number of fluctuations) x 100], and the calculated execution ratio of the first set suggested effect is equal to the execution of the first set suggested effect for each known set value. By judging which set value of the ratio is approximated, the player can guess the set value.

If you decide to execute the expectation of expectation notice, if you adopt a configuration in which the expectation of the expectation notice is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion production, and the expectation of the expectation notice will be executed before the decision or not, and the expectation of the expectation will be executed. In some cases, the selection itself is not performed, or a case where the first setting suggestion production is not executed by giving priority to the expectation of the expectation of the first setting suggestive production. As a result, the degree of divergence between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual setting value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the setting value is lowered, and there is a possibility that the player will not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in steps S16TM2000 and S16TM2020 in FIG. 9-5, a configuration is adopted in which whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion performance is determined before execution or non-execution of the expectation level announcement performance, and the first setting suggestion performance is executed with priority over the expectation level announcement performance.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first set suggestive effect, the second set suggestive effect, and the expectation level announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10. 9-8 is a time chart when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level announcement effect are executed, and FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level announcement effect are executed.

9-8 to 9-10 is an example of a case where the CPU 103 determines in the first start winning determination process (S101A) that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning will be a "big hit" (specified by a symbol specifying command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to be the red mode in step S16TM1010 in the change effect determination process at the time of starting winning, determines the change pattern of the active display to be the change pattern 022 in step S16TM1020, and determines to execute the first change effect of the success mode.

Also, this is an example of a case where the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" at the start of the variation (designated by the display result designation command), and determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variable display to be "super reach big hit (120 seconds)" (specified by the variation pattern command). Based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 in the process of determining effect at the time of variation start, determines to execute the expectation level advance notice effect in step S16TM2020, determines to set the display result of the second variable display of the mini-slot to be "rapid heat" in step S16TM2040, and determines to execute the second change effect in step S16TM2050. This is an example of a case where it is determined that the establishment hand of the expectation level announcement effect is "Cherry (Freeze)" and that the second set suggestive effect is to be executed in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols when the variable display is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (in this example, "247"). ”) is continuously displayed. In addition, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the combination of small symbols ("247" in this example) when the variable display is fixed and stopped is continuously displayed in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 to display four first reserved displays 16TM001 in response to the fact that the number of first reserved memories is four.

When it is in the low probability low base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the image display device 5 shows the number of times the variable display is performed during the period of the low probability low base state (normal state). A variation number display 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, after shifting to the low-probability-low base state, it is assumed that the variation display has been performed 124 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the mini-slot symbol combination (in this example, [replay], [replay], and [bell]) when the variable display is fixed and stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the establishment combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini-slot symbols executed last time (executed most recently) was "miss".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-8), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and displays three first reservation displays 16TM001 in the first reservation display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 corresponding to the number of the first reservation storage being 3.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second setting suggestion effect based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070 in a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is continued in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. In this example, after shifting to the low-probability-low base state, it is assumed that the variation display has been performed 125 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. The player understands that the setting has been suggested by the fact that the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 has changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(3), the effect control CPU 120, in the state where the variable display of decorative symbols is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-8), determines to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000. Start variable display (first minislot variable display). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(4), the effect control CPU 120, in the state where the variable display of decorative patterns is continued in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-8), terminates the second setting suggestion effect, and returns the variation count display 16TM040 (characters such as "125") displayed in purple mode to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbols continues, and in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the CPU120 for directing control is a change in the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the pattern display area of the image display device 5 (the timing of T4 shown in FIG. The first change of success is performed based on the decision to change the pattern to the change pattern 022, and based on the decision to execute the first change of success in a successful manner. In this example, a character 16TM050 appears and an effect is executed in which a ball is thrown toward the active display 16TM003. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 hits the active display 16TM003, the player can expect that the mode of the active display 16TM003 will change.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, and continues variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 16TM003 from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, from the white round display to the red round display) in response to the execution of the first changing effect of the success mode in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the combination of mini-slot symbols ([Bell] [Bell] [Bell] in this example) when the first set suggestion performance is executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(7), the effect control CPU 120 executes the expectation level announcement effect based on the fact that it has been decided in step S16TM2050 that the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect is to be "cherry (freeze)" in a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-8), and the mini-slot symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 is executed. At 1, 5C1, and 5R1, the variable display of the freeze mode mini-slot symbols is started. In this example, when the variable display in the freeze mode is executed, a darkened image 16TM100 is displayed as a cover image covering the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot patterns and making it difficult to see. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In the present embodiment, the darkened image 16TM100 covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is displayed in order to reduce the visibility of the mini-slot symbols, so that the mini-slot symbol having a lower display priority than the darkened image 16TM100 becomes slightly visible although it is difficult to see (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%). A mini-slot pattern having a display priority lower than that of TM100 (an image whose display layer is lower and which can be seen deeper than the darkened image 16TM100 from the viewpoint of the player) can be completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 becomes 0%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(8), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2050 in a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is continued in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-8), based on the fact that it has been decided that the establishment hand of the expectation level announcement effect is "Cherry (Freeze)" in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R of the image display device 5. At 1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) when the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 to stop and display the decorative symbol “7” at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern, and displays the characters “reach!!” on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T8 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, even in a small pattern display area 5l corresponding to a pattern display area 5L in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and a small pattern display area 5r corresponding to a pattern display area 5R in which decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are continuously and variably displayed without being stopped and displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display with the establishment of the ready-to-win state as a trigger. That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the three-reel mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 to the one-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. In the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of one reel, it is possible to display any of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols ("no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", "FEVER") as a display result, and when the display result is a symbol including a notice character ("CHANCE", "hot heat", "FEVER"), a second change effect is executed in which the icon of the notice character resulting from the display is added to the active display based on the display result. . Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the CPU120 for directing control has determined to determine the display result of the second mini slot variable display in step S16TM2040, which is based on the fact that it is determined to be the "heat" of the predictable notice production as "intense heat". The mini slot design display area 5LCR1 of the device 5 is stopped and displayed the pattern containing the "intense heat" trailer (the T9 timing in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second change effect (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8) based on the decision to execute the second change effect (stop display of the symbol including the notice character) in step S16TM2040. In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the symbol of 'hot heat' in this example) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 moves from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 to the active display area 16TM013, and the effect acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image showing that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "hot" symbol) jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, it is suggested to the player that the mode of the active display 16TM003 will change. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), a battle effect is executed according to the variation pattern of super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing the character icon (in this example, the character icon of "hot") based on the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. That is, a text icon indicating the same text as the displayed notice text ("rapid heat" in this example) is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, a combination of mini-slot symbols ([Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] in this example) in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (FIG. 9-9(8)), followed by the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. 9-10 (10)) as notice characters of the expectation level notice effect, and thereafter, a second change effect is executed in which a character icon showing the same characters (in this example, "rapid heat") as the characters of the mini-slot symbol stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003 (FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the second change performance of changing the display mode of the active display 16TM003 according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion performance is executed, so that the interest of the setting suggestion performance can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is ended before the battle effect executed according to the variation pattern of super reach is started. That is, before the battle effect is executed, the combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect ([Bell] [Bell] [Bell] in this example) is not displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加Thus, by executing the first setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value in the first half of the variable display (before establishment of the ready-to-reach state), that is, in the stage before the display result of the variable display is suggested, interest in the first setting suggestion performance can be enhanced. Further, in the latter half of the variable display (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), i.e., at the stage after the display result of the variable display is suggested (after the battle performance for notifying whether the display result will be a ``big win'' is started), the display result of the variable display (the result of the battle performance) can be noticed because the first set suggestion performance is already finished.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) in which the established combination is "lost" is stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggesting effect, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell] [Bell] [Bell]) in which the established hand is "Bell" stops in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), when it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect and the established hand is determined to be "Cherry", the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the established hand is "Cherry" stops in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5 ([Cherry] [Cherry] [Cherry] in this example). In this way, since any one of a plurality of types of established hands can be stop-displayed in the mini-slot 16TM030, interest in the game can be improved by executing variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot 16TM030.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), in the lower left area of the screen of the image display device 5, which is different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), a second setting suggestion effect is executed in which the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect is in the range of 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), the execution ratio of the second set suggestion effect is in the range of 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6). The value is easy to guess. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion performance is compared with a predetermined performance execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6), and the set value corresponding to the performance execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the game machine. The execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion performance is compared with a predetermined performance execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6), and the set value corresponding to the performance execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the game machine. When such estimation is performed, the set value estimated based on the number of times of execution of the second setting suggestion performance is more likely to be the set value of the game machine than the set value estimated based on the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion performance (reliability of setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery for the first setting suggesting performance is performed for each variable display, and the execution lottery for the second setting suggesting performance is performed for each 25 times of variable display, so that the execution frequency of the first set suggesting performance is higher than the execution frequency of the second set suggesting performance. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times than the second setting suggestion effect within the same fluctuation display frequency (within the same time), so it is useful for estimating the set value. In this way, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the setting value suggested by the effect is the setting value of the gaming machine at different rates, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 perform variable display of small patterns. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the special effect area 16TM035 (bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5), the first setting suggesting effect is executed, and in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the second setting suggesting effect is executed. In this way, while the variable display of the small patterns is executed as a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols in the upper part of the screen, the set suggestion performance (first set suggestion performance, second set suggestion performance) is executed in the lower part of the screen, so that the visibility of the other performance is not lowered by one of the performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3(A), there are multiple types of display modes (display colors) such as a normal mode, a blue mode, and a red mode as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9(5), when the character 16TM050 appears and the action effect of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed, the first change effect of changing the display mode (display color) of the active display 16TM003 from the normal mode (white circular display) to the red mode (red circular display) is executed. In addition, a second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the time of start of variation, and a second change performance is executed for adding the icon of the character indicated by the character pattern to the active display 16TM003 based on the character pattern that is the display result. In this way, by providing a plurality of types of change effects, namely, the first change effect of changing the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in a region different from the region where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the second change effect of changing the display shape of the active display according to the effect effect based on the notice character displayed in the region (special effect region 16TM035) where the first setting suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to further improve the interest in changing the active display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), when the second change effect is executed, a mini-slot symbol (“hot” in this example) stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hits the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013. Specifically, after an effect image showing that the mini-slot pattern ("hot heat" in this example) jumping out of the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, a character icon indicating the same characters as the characters of the stopped mini-slot pattern in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the winning hand of the expectation level announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is determined to be any one of "lost", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching". Then, according to the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of which display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", and "FEVER" is different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is any of the character patterns of "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu", and "FEVER", the form of the character pattern matches the form of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, the proportion of the form of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003 is different depending on the winning hand of the expectation degree announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of tally result of winning hand)
In this embodiment, during the demo display, a menu screen including a ``volume adjustment'' icon for adjusting the volume during the game, an ``light intensity adjustment'' icon for adjusting the light intensity during the game, and a ``mini reel information'' icon for confirming the number of variable display times (variable display times of special symbols) in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) and the number of wins of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030, etc. is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, it is possible to select each icon of "volume control", "light amount control", and "mini reel information".

9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of mini reel information displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, characters "mini-reel information" are displayed. In the center of the screen of the image display device 5, mini-reel information 16TM200 including the cumulative number of variable displays (variable display of special symbols) performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) and the winning count of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030, a selected tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and a next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, in the right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Further, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "return".

In the mini-reel information 16TM200, characters ``number of rotations'' are displayed at the top as an item indicating the number of times of variation display, and correspondingly, the total number of times ``XXXX times'' of variation display executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is displayed. In the second row, the character "Bell" is displayed as an item indicating the bell of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "Bell" is the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display "AAAA times" and the winning probability of "Bell" "(1/aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times `Bell' has been established / Cumulative number of variable display performed in the low-probability low base state (normal state)] are displayed. In the third row, the word "watermelon" is displayed as an item indicating watermelon as the winning combination, and correspondingly, the total number of times "watermelon" has been established as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display "BBBB times" and the winning probability of "watermelon" "(1/bbbb.b)" [=the cumulative number of times "watermelon" has been established / the cumulative number of variable display performed in the low-probability low base state (normal state)] are displayed. In the fourth row, the character "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination "cherry", and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "cherry" has been established as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display "CCCC times" and the winning probability of "cherry" "(1/cccc.c)" [=the total number of times "cherry" has been established / the cumulative number of variable display performed in the low-probability low base state (normal state)] are displayed. In the fifth row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating 7 matching of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times that the winning combination is "7 matching" in the first mini-slot variable display "DDDD times" and the winning probability of "7 matching" "(1/dddd.d)" [=Total number of times "7 matching" is established / Cumulative number of variable display performed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] are displayed.

The total number of winning "7 sets" (DDDD times) only indicates the number of times that the combination of mini-slot patterns ([7] [7] [7] in this example) that results in "7 sets" in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030 is stopped, is tabulated separately from the number of occurrences of big wins, and is displayed as an item different from the number of occurrences of big wins.

Also, each total number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed with a maximum of four digits, and the count stops at "9999 times". Also, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1/9999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of wins is one or more, the probability of winning is displayed, and if the number of wins is 0, the probability of winning is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the history information (such as the above-mentioned total number of times) related to the mini-reel information is stored in the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 can display the mini-reel information on the image display device 5 based on the stored history information. Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before last" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

The mini-reel information is defaulted to the mini-reel information of "today", characters of "today" are displayed on the currently selected tab 16TM210, and characters of "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation prompting display 16TM270 prompting the user to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Each time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", the characters of the selected tab 16TM210 are switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the characters of the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched from "the day before" to "today". Then, when the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the mini-reel information of ``two days before'' is selected, the mini-reel information is switched to ``today'' again, the characters of the selected tab 16TM210 are switched to ``today'', and the characters of the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched to ``the previous day''.

When the game machine is powered on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on is different from the date of the current power-on, the history information of 'the previous day' is stored in the storage area corresponding to 'the day before the previous day' (overwriting of the history information), and then the history information of 'today' is stored in the storage area corresponding to 'the previous day' (overwriting of the history information) to update the data. As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business on 'today', it is possible to display the mini-reel information of 'the day before' and 'the day before' based on the history information of 'the day before' and 'the day before' after updating stored in the backup storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "Return". When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM280 is being displayed, the display of the mini-reel information ends and the menu screen returns.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, the mini reel information based on the backed up history information of "today", "the day before" and "the day before" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, in the mini-reel information 16TM200, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion performance and the winning probability of "Bell" "(1/aaaa.a)" [=Total number of times "Bell" is established/Total number of fluctuation display executed in the low-probability low base state (normal state)] are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestive effect by himself/herself, calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect by the player himself/herself, and determines which set value of the execution ratio of the first set suggestive effect for each well-known set value approximates the calculated execution ratio of the first set suggestive effect, thereby estimating the set value. However, when the player counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect by himself/herself, the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect may be erroneously counted. In this embodiment, by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the demonstration display, the player can confirm the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect (the winning probability of "Bell") in the mini-reel information. Therefore, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is erroneously counted, the correct execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are effects suggesting the currently set setting value, but the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect can be said to be effects suggesting that the setting has been changed. For example, when the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion performance is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the first setting suggestion performance corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion performance is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion performance corresponding to the setting value 2, it is difficult for the player to estimate the actual setting value. However, in such a situation, when the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion performance indicated by the mini-reel information of 'the day before' and 'the day before' are both close to the execution ratio (the well-known execution ratio) of the first setting suggestion performance corresponding to the set value 1, the player can at least guess that the possibility of the setting value being changed is high. That is, it can be inferred that the set value of "the day before" and "the day before last" is set value 1, and since the set value of "today" is highly likely to have been changed, it can be inferred that the current set value is at least set value 2 or more.

Note that the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates depending on whether or not the setting value is changed on the day. For example, if the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates according to the set value. For example, an effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while when the set value is 3 or more, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state differs according to the established hand, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "lost" < "watermelon" < "cherry" < "7 matching". For example, the degree of expectation that the type of jackpot will be a variable probability jackpot differs depending on the established combination, and the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"7 sets".

(3) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the first variable display of the mini-slot in which the winning combination is "lost" is performed based on the decision not to perform the first setting suggestion effect (first time). .

When such a performance configuration is adopted and based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion performance, (ii) when the first variable mini-slot display itself is not executed, (a) when it is decided to execute the expectation level announcement performance, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation level announcement performance is executed, and after establishing a successful combination other than "Bell" (including "loss") as the establishment role, the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation level announcement performance is executed. On the other hand, when (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion performance, and (b) when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement performance, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display is executed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect is reported. For example, the mini reel information may be displayed on the image display device 5 and the execution probability of the first setting suggestion performance may be notified by selecting the icon of "mini reel information" by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the period of the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period or during the period of the variable display. The execution probability of the first setting suggesting performance may be notified without requiring an operation, for example, the execution probability of the first setting suggesting performance may be displayed at the end of a period advantageous to the player, such as the ending period of the jackpot game state or the variable display when the high base state ends.

(5) In the above embodiment, the example in which the mini-reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown, but the mini-reel information may be displayed in an area different from the image display device 5 without being limited to such a form. For example, in a game machine provided with a sub-image display device for displaying various performance images different from the image display device 5, the mini-reel information may be displayed on the sub-image display device during demonstration display, jackpot game state, or variable display.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the second change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display. For example, the display result (character pattern) of the second mini-slot variable display may be used to execute a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the non-executed variable display (variable display to be the target of the pre-reading notice), and the second change effect to add the character icon based on the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to the pending display corresponding to the target variable display of the pre-reading notice. In this way, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that is being executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that is not being executed. Further, the target of the corresponding information to be changed by the second change effect is not limited to the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display being executed (active display), but may be the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display not being executed (holding display).

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display performed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (three reels) can be performed up to two times (the first winning hand is "Bell" or "Loss", and the second winning hand is other than "Bell"), but this is not limiting, and the first mini-slot variable display may be performed three times or more. For example, the first mini-slot variable display may be executed twice based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion performance, and the first mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation level advance notice performance may be executed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation level advance notice performance may be carried out further based on the determination to execute the expectation level notice performance. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, it is possible to set the first winning hand as "lost" and then set the second winning hand as "Bell" (first setting suggestive performance), and after the third winning hand as "watermelon", the fourth winning hand as "cherry".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the second mini-slot variable display is performed only once based on the decision to perform the expectation degree announcement effect. However, the second mini-slot variable display may be performed two or more times. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANCE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be "rapid heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that a display result with a high degree of expectation is not followed by a display result with a low degree of expectation, and the downfall of the notice character is restricted.

In addition, the second change effect may be executed multiple times in response to the fact that the second mini-slot variable display is executed multiple times. For example, based on the display result of the first mini-slot variable display being "CHANCE", the character icon of "CHANCE" may be superimposed on the active display, and thereafter, based on the display result of the second mini-slot variable display being "rapid heat", the character icon of "rapid heat" may be superimposed and displayed on the active display instead of the character icon of "CHANCE". In this way, when the second change performance is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so as not to change from a display mode with a high expectation to a display mode with a low expectation, and the deterioration of the display mode of the active display is restricted.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode was exemplified as a special mode of variable display of the mini-slot symbols. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the above-described freeze mode, a mode in which the speed at which the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (the speed of scrolling) is extremely faster or extremely slower than in the normal mode may be provided, or a mode in which the mini-slot symbols displayed variably are enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode) may be provided. Furthermore, the ratio of winning hands may differ according to the type of special mode. For example, the second special mode (freeze mode) may have a higher ratio of ``Cherry'' or ``7 matching'' in the variable display of the mini-slot symbols than in the first special mode (mode in which the mini-slot symbols are enlarged).

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as variable display patterns of mini-slot symbols, a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbols, the winning hand may be determined at different ratios. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of the winning combination of "Cherry" or "7 matching" may be higher than in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds.

(11) In the above embodiment, at the timing when a combination of mini-slot symbols is stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (a winning combination is established), an effect image may be displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 in a manner corresponding to the winning combination. For example, a blue effect image may be displayed when "replay" is established as a successful hand, a yellow effect image may be displayed when "bell" is established as a successful role, a green effect image may be displayed when "watermelon" is established as a successful role, a red effect image may be displayed when "cherry" is established as a successful role, and a rainbow colored effect image may be displayed when "seven match" is established as a successful role.

(12) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 show an example in which "7 matching" is stop-displayed as a winning combination to inform that a big win has been confirmed. Stopping display of "all BARs" as an established combination means stopping display of the combination of [BAR][BAR][BAR] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. Further, it may be configured such that when "7 matching" is established, the probability variable big win is decided, and when "BAR matching" is established, the normal big win is decided.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbols is information that can be displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the special symbols is being executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbols is being executed), and regardless of the number of pending memories. For example, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period in which the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) except for "Loss" is not established multiple times during one variable display of special symbols. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if all the number of times a winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the total number of times, it becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information for estimating the set value, namely, [How many times of variation display of the n times of variation display did the winning combination [Bell] come true?], and the importance of the information displayed on the mini reel information 16TM200 decreases, and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, even when the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established a plurality of times during the variable display of one special pattern, the number of times the same winning combination is established during this variable display is counted as one, and the total number of times is counted. For example, even if the winning combination of ``Bell'' is established three times during one variable display of the special pattern, the number of times the winning combination of ``Bell'' is established during this variable display is considered to be one, and 1 is added to the accumulated number of winnings of ``Bell'' of the mini reel information 16TM200.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the change number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. However, with regard to a specific set value (for example, a set value such as 5 or 6 that is particularly advantageous to the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from other set values. For example, when the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the change number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (eg, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value, and when the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the change number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (eg, gold mode) at the rate corresponding to the set value. As to whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, a lottery is performed once in 25 times as described above, whereas as to whether to use the second setting suggestion mode, a separate lottery may be performed at a rate of once in 50 times. Then, when the second setting suggestion mode is determined, regardless of whether or not the first setting suggestion mode is determined, the change number display 16TM040 is set to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode).

(16) In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), an example is shown in which the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common regardless of the variation pattern (variation time). However, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may differ depending on the variation pattern (variation time).

(17) In the above embodiment, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is executed in the lower center of the screen, and the display result suggests the setting value. For example, an effect may be executed in which one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the character that has appeared.

Incidentally, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols may be performed in an area different from the central lower portion of the screen. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (do not overlap) with the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, or it may be executed in a display device (so-called sub display device) different from the image display device 5.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect acting on the suspended display and the effect acting on the active display are executed in the lower center portion of the screen (see (11) in FIG. 9-10) or in the lower right portion (see (5) in FIG. 9-9), but these effects may be executed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in a region that is at the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (do not overlap) with the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, or it may be executed in a display device (so-called sub display device) different from the image display device 5.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion effect and the expectation degree announcement effect by the variable display of the mini-slot pattern are executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), but not limited to this.

In such an effect configuration, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect (percentage that the established hand is "Bell") is the ratio of the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (the number of times that the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed and the established hand is "Bell") in the game state)]. The execution ratio of the set suggestion effect is calculated by (the number of times the variable display of the mini-slot symbols executed in the high-probability-high base state (special symbol) variable display times)], and the set value is suggested by the calculated value.In addition, when the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is executed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state), [(the variable display of the mini-slot symbols executed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state) and the established hand is "Bell" The execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance is calculated by (the number of times of becoming) ÷ (the number of times of variable display of the decoration pattern (special pattern) executed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state))], and the set value is suggested by the calculated value.

The above [description of the characteristic part 16TM] shows an example of the configuration related to the following means A1 to A10 and an example of the configuration related to the following means B1 to B10.

Here, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and that displays a character image according to the set value before and after the setting change. As for a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the entertainment of the presentation. The configuration related to means A1 to means A10 shown below and the configuration related to means B1 to means B10 shown below have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aim to improve the interest of the performance related to the game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values.

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means A1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means is capable of displaying a special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the established hand is "Bell") corresponding to the setting suggestion related to the setting means, and a specific display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the established hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching", symbols of "no display", "CHANCE", "rapid heat", or "FEVER") corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state,
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (when the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach (10 seconds), normal reach (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell" can be stopped), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the special display can be displayed after the special display (variation pattern (variation time) is super In the case of a reach loss (120 seconds) or a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), after the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning combination is ``bell'' is stopped and displayed, the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning combination is ``watermelon'', ``cherry'' or ``7 sets'' is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the patterns of ``no display'', ``CHANCE'', ``hot heat'', or ``FEVER'' can be stopped and displayed).
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the special display with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve interest in setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) executes variable display (variable display), the effect control means determines whether or not the special display is to be displayed at a different rate according to the set value (it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is executed for each variable display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestive effect is different according to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to guess the set value when the variable display is performed.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) executes variable display (variable display), the effect control means determines whether or not to display the special display at a different rate according to the set value, and after making the determination, determines whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 20 determines whether or not to execute the expectation level notice effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3,
The display means (performance control CPU 120, image display device 5) hides the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning combination is "Bell") when a specific performance (battle performance in super ready-to-win) is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) can execute variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell") or the specific display (mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching") in the specific area. or a combination of ``CHANCE'', ``hot heat'', or ``FEVER''), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot patterns in which the winning combination is ``miss'', or a pattern of ``no display'').
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1),
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the rate of control to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. Therefore, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in the normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as successful hands, and "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results),
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is higher in the order of "watermelon"<"cherry"<"7sets")
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying information on the display history (the winning probability that the winning hand is "Bell") when a predetermined condition is established (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B).
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8,
The display means (production control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
Different from the rate at which the special display is displayed and the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by lottery for each variable display, and the second set suggestion effect is performed by lottery for each 25 times of variable display),
The proportion at which the set value suggested by the special display corresponds to the set value of the gaming machine is different from the proportion at which the set value suggested by the special display corresponds to the set value of the gaming machine (as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 2 Since it is 0% (set value 6), the setting value estimated based on the actual effect execution ratio and the setting value of the game machine are different between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the ratio of the suggested set value to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether it is a special display or a special display, it is possible to draw attention to which display suggests the set value.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9,
The variable display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of the first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) in the first region (decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the center of the screen), and is capable of executing variable display of the second decoration identification information (variable display of small patterns) in the second region (small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r in the upper right portion of the screen), which is less visible than the first decoration identification information.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of displaying at least one of the special display and the specific display in the first area (a combination of mini-slot symbols is displayed in the mini-reel symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 at the bottom center of the screen), and restricts the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area (no mini-slot symbols are displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visibility of the variable display of the second decoration identification information in the second area.

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means B1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means is capable of displaying, in a specific area, a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the established hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggested control of the advantageous state (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the established hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching", or "no display", "chance", "great heat", or "fever" symbols),
Corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
9-9(8), the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, and then the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is stopped and displayed with the character symbol "Super Heat" as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10)). As shown in (11) and (12), the game machine is characterized by comprising an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effect execution means (a second change effect for adding a character icon indicating the same character as the characters of the mini-slot symbol ("rapid heat") to the active display 16TM030).
According to such a configuration, the game machine capable of displaying the special display corresponding to the setting suggestion can execute the change performance in response to the display of the specific display in the specific area, so that the entertainment of the performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
There are multiple types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as modes of the corresponding display (active display),
The game machine, wherein the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first change effect) for changing the special mode of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the display corresponding to the special mode will change.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing, as the change effect (second change effect), a effect that acts on the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), an effect image showing that the mini-slot symbol ("Gekiketsu") stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003 is displayed. After that, a character icon indicating the same character as the character ("Gekiatsu") of the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the changing presentation.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine of means B1 to means B3,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display (the first variable display of the mini-slot includes "miss", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching", and the display results of the second variable display of the mini-slot include "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", and "FEVER");
Depending on the type of the specific display, the aspect of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at different ratios (as shown in FIGS. 9-7(K) and (L), the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement effect is determined to be "miss", "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets"), and depending on which winning combination is determined, the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANCE", or "hot heat". , and "FEVER".Since the display result of the second variable mini-slot display matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, the proportion of the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003 is different depending on which one is determined as the winning hand of the first variable mini-slot display in the expectation level announcement effect.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the type of specific display and the mode of corresponding display can be associated with each other, and the entertainment of the presentation can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) executes the variable display (variable display), the effect control means determines whether or not to display the special display at a different rate according to the set value, and after making the determination, determines whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 20 determines whether or not to execute the expectation level notice effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) can execute variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") or the specific display (mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching") in the specific area. or a combination of ``CHANCE'', ``Super heat'', or ``FEVER''), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot patterns in which the winning combination is ``miss'', or a pattern of ``no display'').
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1),
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the rate of control to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. Therefore, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in the normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display ("watermelon", "cherry", and "seven matching" are available as successful hands, and "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results),
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher in the order of "watermelon"<"cherry"<"7sets")
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying information on the display history (the winning probability that the winning hand is "Bell") when a predetermined condition is established (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B).
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9,
The display means (production control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
Different from the rate at which the special display is displayed and the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by lottery for each variable display, and the second set suggestion effect is performed by lottery for each 25 times of variable display),
The proportion at which the set value suggested by the special display corresponds to the set value of the gaming machine is different from the proportion at which the set value suggested by the special display corresponds to the set value of the gaming machine (as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 2 Since it is 0% (set value 6), the setting value estimated based on the actual effect execution ratio and the setting value of the game machine are different between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the ratio of the suggested set value to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether it is a special display or a special display, it is possible to draw attention to which display suggests the set value.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 27TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 27TM will be described. The gaming machine shown in the above [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], that is, the gaming machine capable of changing the setting value may include the following characteristic portion 27TM.

Specifically, in the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 27TM, the effect image (the effect image corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol is reduced, and divided effect is executed in which the effect display area is divided into the left part and the effect display area right part and displayed (see FIG. 10-1). By this division performance, the player can be given an impression as if the variable display of a plurality of special patterns (or the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns corresponding to the variable displays of the plurality of special patterns) are simultaneously executed in parallel. In this [description of characteristic portion 27TM], the description of the configuration similar to that shown in the above-described [description of characteristic portion 16TM] is omitted.

(Screen configuration when executing split effects)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect information displayed on the screen when the split effect is executed in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the area in which the effect information can be displayed (the area of the entire screen) in the image display device 5 is defined as the effect display area 27TM005A.

First small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are provided in the upper left part of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r perform the variable display of the first small pattern corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern. In addition, a second small pattern display area is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the effect display area 27TM005A, and in this second small pattern display area, variable display of the second small pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

That is, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the performance symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols (main performance symbols) is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variable display of the first small symbols (sub-performance symbols smaller and less visible than the main performance symbols) is performed in the first small design display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Further, as the variable display of the performance patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special patterns, the variable display of decorative patterns (main performance patterns) is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the variable display of the second small patterns (secondary performance patterns smaller and less visible than the main performance patterns) is executed in the second small pattern display areas.

At the lower part of the production display area 27TM005A, the first hold memory (1st hold display 27TM010 of 0 to 4) is displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011, and the active display 27 tm030 corresponding to the current fluctuation display is displayed 27 tm031, and the second hold not. The second hold display area 27TM021 that displays the 27 tm020) of 0 to 4 27TM020) is provided. With the active display area 27TM031 in the center, the left side as seen from the player is the first holding display area 27TM011, and the right side is the second holding display area 27TM021.

In addition, a first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number numerically is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the effect display area 27TM005A in the center in the vertical direction. Since the number of objects (first reserved display 27TM010) corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011, the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 is less conspicuous and less visible than the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011. In addition, since the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number (second reserved display 27TM020) is displayed in the second reserved display area 27TM021, the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 is less conspicuous and less visible than the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved display area 27TM021.

In the divided performance, the combination of the decorative pattern (main performance pattern) to be variably displayed and the frame surrounding the decorative pattern is increased from one set to two sets, one of which is displayed in the first performance image display area 27TM100A and the other is displayed in the second performance image display area 27TM200A. A first effect image 27TM100 and a first effect image frame 27TM110 including a first decoration pattern (first main effect pattern) are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a second effect image 27TM200 and a second effect image frame 27TM210 including a second decoration pattern (second main effect pattern) are displayed.

Thus, the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A are both effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. For example, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the first performance information and the second performance information are simultaneously displayed in parallel corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (variable display of the common special pattern).

Here, the first effect information (effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A) is the effect information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect display area 27TM005 continues during the variable display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command even after the division effect ends. Including effect information that can be displayed in A (for example, the first decoration pattern).

On the other hand, the second effect information (effect information including the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A) is also effect information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. This is effect information that disappears (is controlled to be hidden).

Further, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are images displayed side by side for a predetermined period (within the period during which the divided effect is executed), and one of them may be in a different mode from the other during the predetermined period. Further, in the present embodiment, an image of a notice effect (for example, a cut-in image of a cut-in notice effect, which will be described later) may be superimposed on the first effect image 27TM100.

On the other hand, the second effect image 27TM200 is an image based on a movie (in this example, movie A (short/long) and movie B (short/long) to be described later) for a predetermined period corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the preview effect image suggesting the display result of the variable display decided in the effect determination processing at the time of variation start is not superimposed and displayed, but the preview effect image (for example, a cut-in image to be described later) may be displayed as an image in the movie.

When the divided effect is executed, (1) the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed in the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed in the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. is formed, and the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A may be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, (1) effect control of the first pattern is executed in the divided effect.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines when the special symbols start to fluctuate (for example, determines when the first special symbols start to fluctuate), and (1) the right part of the screen is the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the left part of the screen is the second effect image display area 27TM200A. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed on the left side of the screen (see FIG. 10-1).

In addition, based on the determination by the CPU 103 when the special symbols start to fluctuate (for example, the determination when the first special symbols start to fluctuate), (2) the right portion of the screen is the second effect image display area 27TM200A and the left portion of the screen is the first effect image display area 27TM100A, based on the decision to execute the effect control of the second pattern, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed in the left part of the screen, and the right part of the screen. , the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed.

In the split effect, when the effect control of the first pattern is executed and the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (in the case of FIG. 10-1), the first effect image 27TM100 including the background image and the decoration pattern, and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed in such a way that the left side of the rectangle (center side of the screen) is shorter than the right side of the rectangle (right side of the screen). The upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the space between them narrows from the right end (right side of the screen) toward the left end (center side of the screen). That is, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are positioned in the virtual three-dimensional space from the right end (right side of the screen) to the left end (center side of the screen) on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player).

In addition, the second effect image 27TM200 including the background image and the decoration pattern reduced before the division effect, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed such that the right side of the rectangle (the side on the center side of the screen) is shorter than the left side of the rectangle (the side on the left side of the screen), and the upper side and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the interval between them narrows from the left end (the left side of the screen) toward the right end (the center side of the screen). That is, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are located in the depth side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) to the right end (center side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space.

On the other hand, when the second pattern of effect control is executed in the split effect, the second effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the first effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (contrary to FIG. 10-1), the first effect image 27TM100 including the background image and the decorative pattern, and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are reduced in size before the split effect, and the right side of the rectangle (center side of the screen) is shorter than the left side of the rectangle (left side of the screen). The upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the distance between the two narrows from the left end (left side of the screen) toward the right end (center side of the screen). That is, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 have the right end (center side of the screen) of the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space positioned on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player), and the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

In addition, the second effect image 27TM200 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced before the division effect and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed such that the left side of the rectangle (the side on the center side of the screen) is shorter than the right side of the rectangle (the side on the right side of the screen), and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the interval between them narrows from the right end (the right side of the screen) toward the left end (the center side of the screen). That is, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are located in the depth side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space.

(First embodiment)
As shown in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 that receives the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value. In the first embodiment described below, as an example in which the setting suggesting effect can be executed during the divided effect, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the setting suggesting effect is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(Specific example of split production)
A specific aspect of the split rendering will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the split effect is executed.

In this embodiment, a performance control CPU 120 that receives a variation pattern designation command accompanied by a split performance displays a performance image corresponding to the variation pattern designation command accompanied by a division performance and performance images of various performances determined by performance determination processing at the time of variation start in a performance display area 27TM005A during the variable display period of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (1), before the execution of the split effect, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the variable display of the first special pattern, the variable display of the decoration pattern (main effect pattern) as the decoration identification information is performed. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and is performing the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 displays a single background image in the performance display area 27TM005A before execution of the split performance, displays a left decoration pattern in the pattern display area 5L on the left side of the center of the performance display region 27TM005A, displays a middle decoration pattern in the pattern display area 5C in the center of the performance display region 27TM005A, and displays a right decoration pattern in the pattern display area 5R on the right side of the center of the performance display region 27TM005A. display.

The display mode of the background image and the decoration pattern before division performance is a mode in which a plurality of decoration patterns (left decoration pattern, middle decoration pattern and right decoration pattern) are superimposed and displayed on the rectangular background image at the same size and at regular intervals. That is, the background image and the decoration pattern are arranged in parallel with the screen in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the background image and the decoration pattern are viewed from a viewpoint in the direction perpendicular to the screen (on the player side of the screen).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved memory number is 3, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes two sets of combinations of the background image and the decoration pattern to appear on the performance display area 27TM005A based on the background image and the decoration pattern of the information displayed in the performance display area 27TM005A in accordance with the execution of the divisional performance. One of the combinations becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-2(2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect image 27TM100 to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image 27TM200 to be displayed on the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, the first performance information is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second performance information is displayed on the left side of the screen based on the determination to execute the performance control of the first pattern.

Then, in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the first decorative pattern as the decoration identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed first special pattern, and in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200, the variably displayed second decorative pattern as the decoration identification information is performed in response to the variably displayed first special pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and continues to display "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 continues to display the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 continues to display three first reserved displays 27TM010.

That is, in the present embodiment, even in a state where the split effect is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen, the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015, the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025, the active display area 27TM031, And each position of the first reservation display area 27TM011 is not changed from each position before the start of the division performance, and the first reservation memory number "3", the second reservation memory number "0", the active display 27TM030 and the first reservation display 27TM010 are continuously displayed at each position before the start of the division performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2(3), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the division effect was executed, the effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. In the enlargement display period for gradually enlarging and displaying the first performance image 27TM100, the first performance image 27TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the second performance image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second performance image 27TM200 and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). As described above, regarding the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period, the relationship of the second effect image 27TM200<the first effect image 27TM100 is established. higher than visibility.

After the first effect image 27TM100 is further enlarged and displayed from the state of FIG. 10-2(3) to completely cover the second effect image 27TM200 (after the second effect image 27TM200 becomes completely invisible), the rectangle of the first effect image 27TM100 (the first effect image frame 27TM110) finally overlaps the rectangle of the effect display area 27TM005A (see FIG. 10- 2 (4)), the split effect ends.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 (3) and (4), the first decorative patterns displayed in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100 at the timing when the divided effect ends are displayed as decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the effect display area 27TM005A after the divided effect ends.

Thus, the first effect information is displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A for a longer display period than the second effect information. Further, since the first performance information when the split performance ends and the performance information displayed in the performance display area 27TM005A after the split performance ends have common performance information (for example, a combination of the same decoration patterns), the continuity of the performance is ensured from the execution of the split performance to after the end of the split performance.

Therefore, for the player, the first performance information for which the same performance information is continuously displayed even after the end of the split performance is true performance information, and the second performance information (movie associated with the variation pattern in advance) which is hidden after the end of the split performance is false performance information. Also, it can be said that the first performance information whose visibility is high when the split performance is finished is the true performance information, and the second performance information (movie associated with the variation pattern in advance) whose visibility is low when the split performance is finished is the false performance information.

(Determination of fluctuation pattern)
As described above, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining variation patterns. A CPU 103 determines a variation pattern of the variation display based on a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the display result (“loss” or “big hit”) of the variation display determined at the start of the variation of the special symbols and a random number for variation pattern determination extracted at the time of starting winning. Then, a variation pattern specification command specifying a variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, a winning variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "loss" and a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit" are prepared in advance.

(Variation pattern type)
As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the present embodiment, there are various types of loss variation patterns, such as “non-reach loss”, “normal reach loss”, “super reach A loss”, and “super reach B loss”. For each variation pattern type, there is a variation pattern corresponding to execution/non-execution of split effect, mode of split effect (second display movie type), number of executions of pseudo-run, and mode of pseudo-run (type of pseudo-run).

The variation pattern type of "non-reach loss" is a variation pattern type in which the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the variable display result finally becomes "loss" is fixed and stopped without establishing a reach state after the start of the variable display.

The variation pattern type of ``normal reach loss'' is a variation pattern type in which, after the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the variable display result is finally ``miss'' is stopped without executing a super ready-to-win performance (battle performance) to be described later.

After the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, the variation pattern type of ``super reach A loss'' is a variation pattern type in which a battle performance A is executed as a super reach performance to inform whether or not the ally character and the enemy character A battle to win a jackpot, and further, the performance that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A is executed, and the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the variable display result is finally ``lost'' is fixed and stopped.

After the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, the variation pattern type of ``super reach B loss'' is a variation pattern type in which, as a super reach performance, a battle performance B for informing whether or not the ally character and the enemy character B have a battle to win a jackpot is executed, and further, the performance that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character B is executed, and the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the result of the variable display is finally ``lost'' is fixed and stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this embodiment, there are various kinds of "normal reach jackpot", "super reach A jackpot", and "super reach B jackpot" as the types of jackpot variation patterns. Then, for each variation pattern type, there is a variation pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), and the number of executions of the pseudo-run and the mode of the pseudo-run (pseudo-run type).

The variation pattern type of "normal ready-to-win big hit" is a variation pattern type in which, after the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the result of the variable display finally becomes "big hit" is fixed and stopped without executing a super ready-to-win performance (battle performance) to be described later.

The variation pattern type of ``super reach A big win'' is a variation pattern type in which, after the variation display is started and a ready-to-win state is established, a battle performance A is executed as a super reach performance to notify whether or not the ally character and the enemy character A battle to win the big win, and further, the performance that the ally character wins against the enemy character A is executed, and the combination of decorative patterns indicating that the result of the variable display finally becomes a ``big hit'' is fixed and stopped.

The variation pattern type of ``super reach B big win'' is a variation pattern type in which, after the variation display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, a battle performance B is executed as a super reach performance to inform whether or not the ally character and the enemy character B battle to win the big win, and further, the performance that the ally character wins over the enemy character B is executed, and the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the result of the variable display finally becomes a ``big hit'' is fixed and stopped.

In this way, in the variation patterns accompanied by super reach ("super reach A lost" and "super reach B lost", and "super reach A big hit" and "super reach B big hit"), after the ready reach state is established, as a super reach performance, a battle performance is executed to inform whether or not a big win is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy character. When the final display result is ``big hit'' (when the big winning pattern is fixed and stopped), a performance is performed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and when the final display result is ``losing'' (when the winning pattern is fixed and stopped), a presentation is performed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 10-3, a determination value for determining a variation pattern whose display result is "loss" is assigned to each variation pattern corresponding to each of the variation pattern types of "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "super reach A loss", and "super reach B loss".

In the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-4, a determination value for determining a variation pattern with a display result of "big hit" is assigned to each variation pattern corresponding to each of the variation pattern type of "normal reach big hit", the variation pattern type of "super reach A big hit", and the variation pattern type of "super reach B big hit".

(Pseudo Ren)
In this embodiment, whether or not a pseudo-run is executed and the number of times of execution when the pseudo-run is executed are set for each variation pattern. When a variation pattern for executing a pseudo run one or more times is determined, a performance control CPU 120 that receives a variation pattern specifying command designating the variation pattern executes the pseudo run one or more times during the variable display period of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

Pseudo-continuation is a performance in which the decorative patterns are once temporarily stopped in each display area of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns to the determination and stop of the decorative patterns and the derivation and display of the display results, and then the variable display is performed again. By executing the pseudo run, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed a plurality of times within the period during which the variable display of the special patterns is executed once, that is, within the variable display period of the decorative patterns based on one variable pattern designation command corresponding to one reserved storage.

In the pseudo-run shown in the present embodiment, decorative symbols consisting of numbers are temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol respectively, and then, after the pseudo-continuous symbol consisting of the characters "NEXT" (pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 shown in FIGS. 10-9 (A2) and (B2) to be described later) is temporarily stopped in the display area of the middle symbol, the decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas are temporarily stopped. The variable display is resumed (so-called re-variation is performed). Here, the ``state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped'' is a state in which the decorative pattern does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down, but is not limited to this, and may include a state in which the decorative pattern is swinging, a state in which the decorative pattern repeats expansion and contraction, and a state in which the decorative pattern is in a different form (deformed) from when it is finally stopped (at the time of design determination).

Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, there are pseudo-runs of type X with a low expectation of a big hit and pseudo-runs of a type Y with a high expectation of a big hit as the types of pseudo-runs.

(Loss fluctuation pattern)
As the variation pattern type of "non-reach loss", there is only a variation pattern of "non-reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" in which no division effect is executed and pseudo-run is not executed.

When the display result is "loss", the variation pattern of "non-reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 60%.

As the variation pattern types of ``normal reach failure'', there are a variation pattern of ``normal reach failure [no division performance, no pseudo-run]'' in which division performance is not executed and pseudo-run is not performed, and a variation pattern of ``normal reach failure [no division performance, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]'' in which division performance is not performed and pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is performed once.

When the display result is "loss", the variation pattern of "normal reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and the variation pattern of "normal reach loss [no split effect, pseudo run once (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 5.5%.

As the variation pattern types of "Super reach A failure", the variation pattern "Super reach A failure [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" in which split effects are not performed and no pseudo-run is performed, the variation pattern "Super reach A failure [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]" in which no split effect is performed and a pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is performed once, and the "Super reach A failure" in which no split effect is performed and pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is performed twice There are a variation pattern of [no split performance, pseudo-run twice (type X)]" and a variation pattern of "super reach A lost [no split performance, pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which the division performance is not executed and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is executed twice.

When the display result is "miss", the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" is selected at a rate of 3.5%, the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 1 time (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and "super reach A lost [split]". No effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 2%.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach A missed", the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the same time, a split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie A, is played, and a pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of ``missing super reach A [first pattern divided effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]'' in which a first pattern effect control is executed in which a first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and a second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and at the same time, division effect is executed in which movie A (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among types of movie A is reproduced, and pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is executed twice.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach A lost", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie A, is played, and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of ``super reach A lost [second pattern divided effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]'' in which a second pattern effect control is executed in which a first effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen and a second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and at the same time, division effect is executed in which movie A (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among types of movie A is reproduced, and pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is executed twice.

If the display result is "missing", the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [first pattern split effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [first pattern split effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "super reach A lost [second pattern split effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-run" is selected at a rate of 1%. 2 consecutive times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and the variation pattern of “super reach A lost [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern types of "Super reach B lost", the variation pattern of "Super reach B lost [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which no split effect is performed and no pseudo run is performed, the variation pattern "Super reach B lost [no split effect, 1 pseudo run (type X)]" in which no split effect is performed and a pseudo run of type X with low expectation is performed once, and the "Super reach B failure" in which no split effect is performed and a pseudo run of type Y with high expectation is performed once There are a variation pattern of [no split effect, one pseudo-run (type Y)]", a variation pattern of "super reach B lost [no split effect, two pseudo-runs (type X)]" in which the pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is performed twice without performing the split effect, and a variation pattern of "loss of super reach B [no split effect, two pseudo-runs (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice without performing the split effect.

When the display result is "loss", the variation pattern of "super reach B is lost [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, the variation pattern of "super reach B is lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 1 time (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern of "super reach B is lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 1 time (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach B is lost [split]". A variation pattern of "no effect, pseudo-run twice (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and a variation pattern of "super reach B lost [no division effect, pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach B missed", the first pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and the split effect is performed in which movie B (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie B, is played, and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of "super reach B deviation [first pattern divided effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which a first pattern effect control is executed in which a first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and a second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, a divided effect is executed in which a movie B (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among movie B types is reproduced, and a pseudo-run of a type Y with a high degree of expectation is executed twice.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach B lost", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the split effect is performed in which movie B (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie B, is played, and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of ``missing super reach B [second pattern divided effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]'' in which a second pattern effect control is executed in which a first effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen and a second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, a divided effect is executed in which a movie B (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is reproduced, and a pseudo-run of type Y with a high degree of expectation is executed twice.

When the display result is "miss", the variation pattern of "super reach B lost [first pattern split effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, the variation pattern of "super reach B lost [first pattern split effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "super reach B lost [second pattern split effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-run" is selected at a rate of 0.5%. 2 consecutive times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and the variation pattern of ``missing super reach B [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%.

(Jackpot variation pattern)
As the variation pattern types of the ``normal reach jackpot'', there are a variation pattern of ``normal reach jackpot [no division performance, no pseudo-run]'' in which division performance is not executed and no pseudo-run, and a variation pattern of ``normal reach jackpot [no division performance, 1-time pseudo-run (type X)]'' in which division performance is not performed and pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is executed once.

When the display result is a ``jackpot'', the variation pattern of ``normal reach jackpot [no division performance, no pseudo-run]'' is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and the variation pattern of ``normal reach jackpot [no division performance, pseudo-run once (type X)]'' is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern types of "Super reach A jackpot", the variation pattern of "Super reach A jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which no split effect is performed and no pseudo run is performed, the variation pattern of "Super reach A jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo run (type X)]" in which no split effect is performed and a pseudo run of type X with low expectation is performed once, and the "Super reach A jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo run (type X)]" in which no split effect is performed and pseudo run of type X with low expectation is performed twice. There are a variation pattern of A big hit [no split performance, pseudo-run twice (type X)] and a variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split performance, pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which division performance is not executed and pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split effect, pseudo run 1 time (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split effect, pseudo run 2 times (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and "super reach A" is selected. A variation pattern of "jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 5%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach A big hit", the first pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and the split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie A, is played, and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of ``super reach A jackpot [first pattern divided effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]'' in which a first pattern effect control is executed in which a first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and a second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and at the same time, a divided effect is executed in which a movie A (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among the types of movie A is reproduced, and a pseudo-run of type Y with a high degree of expectation is executed twice.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach A big hit", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie A, is played, and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot [second pattern division performance (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which a second pattern performance control is executed in which a first performance image is displayed on the left side of the screen and a second performance image is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a split performance is performed in which movie A (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among types of movie A is played back, and pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [first pattern split effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 6%, the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [first pattern split effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "super reach A big hit [second pattern split effect (movie A (short))" is selected. , pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 6%, and the variation pattern of “super reach A jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern types of the "super reach B jackpot", the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" in which no split effect is executed and no pseudo-run is performed, the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, one pseudo-run (type X)]" in which no split effect is performed and one pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is performed, and the "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, one pseudo-run (type X)]" in which no split effect is performed and one pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is performed. There is a variation pattern of "B jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type Y)]", a variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [no split effect, 2 pseudo-runs (type X)]" in which no split effect is executed and a pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is executed twice, and a variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [no split effect, 2 pseudo-runs (type Y)]" in which no division effect is executed and pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is executed twice. .

When the display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" is selected at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run once (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run once (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, and the "super reach B big win" is selected. A variation pattern of "[no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, and a variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of the "super reach B jackpot", the first pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, the split effect is performed in which the movie B (short), which has a short playback period among the movie B types, is played, and the high-expectation type Y pseudo-run is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern divided performance (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which performance control of the first pattern is executed in which the first performance image is displayed on the right part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and at the same time, division performance is executed in which movie B (long), which has a long reproduction period among the types of movie B, is reproduced, and pseudo-run of type Y with high expectation is executed twice.

As the variation pattern type of the "super reach B jackpot", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the split effect is performed in which the movie B (short), which has a short playback period among the types of movie B, is played, and the pseudo-run of the type Y with high expectation is performed twice. There is a variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [second pattern divided performance (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which a second pattern performance control is executed in which a first performance image is displayed on the left part of the screen and a second performance image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and at the same time, a divided performance is executed in which a movie B (long) of a type with a long reproduction period among the types of movie B is reproduced, and a pseudo-run of type Y with a high degree of expectation is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern split effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern split effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%, and "super reach B jackpot [second pattern split effect (movie B (short))" is selected. )), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern of “super reach B jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 12%.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the percentage of selection of the variation pattern of "super reach A failure" is [3.5+3+2.5+2+1.5+1+1.5+1=16%], and the percentage of selection of the variation pattern of "super reach B failure" is [2.5+2+1.5+1.5]. +1+1+0.5+1+0.5=11.5%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the ratio of selection of the "super reach A jackpot" variation pattern is [1.5+2+2.5+5+6+7+6+7=37%], and the ratio of selection of the "super reach B jackpot" variation pattern is [2+2.5+3+3+7]. +10+12+10+12=61.5%].

In this way, the ratio of the display result of "big hit" is higher when the variation pattern of "super reach B" is selected than when the variation pattern of "super reach A" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "loss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "loss"), the rate at which the variation pattern of "no split effect execution" is selected from the variation patterns with super reach is the rate of [super reach A (no split effect execution) + super reach B (no split effect execution)], so [(3.5+3+2.5+2)+(2.5+2+1.5+1.5). + 1) = 19.5%], and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern "with split effect execution" among the variation patterns with super reach is the ratio of [super reach A (with split effect execution) + super reach B (with split effect execution)], so [(1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 8%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is a "jackpot"), the ratio of selection of the variation pattern of "no split effect execution" among the variation patterns with super reach is the ratio of [super reach A (no split effect execution) + super reach B (no split effect execution)], so [(1.5+2+2.5+5)+(2+2.5+3+3). +7) = 28.5%], and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern “execution of split effect” among the variation patterns with super reach is the ratio of [super reach A (execution of split effect) + super reach B (execution of split effect)], so [(6 + 7 + 6 + 7) + (10 + 12 + 10 + 12) = 70%].

In this way, the ratio of the display result to be a 'big win' is higher when the variation pattern ``with execution of division performance'' is selected than when the variation pattern ``without execution of division performance'' is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "miss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "miss"), the rate at which the "pseudo-run number 0 (none)" variation pattern is selected is [non-reach loss (pseudo-run number 0 (none)) + normal reach loss (pseudo-run number 0 (none)) + super reach A loss (pseudo run number 0 (none)) + super reach B loss (pseudo run number 0) times (none))], so it is [60 + 7 + 3.5 + 2.5 = 73%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "1 pseudo-run" is selected is the ratio of [normal reach lost (pseudo run number 1) + super reach A missed (pseudo run number 1) + super reach B lost (pseudo run number 1)], so [5.5 + 3 + (2 + 1.5) = 12%], "pseudo run number 2 ” is the ratio of [Super reach A lost (2 pseudo-runs) + Super reach B lost (2 pseudo-runs)], so [(2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 15%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "jackpot"), the ratio of selecting the "pseudo run number 0 (none)" variation pattern is the ratio of [normal reach jackpot (pseudo run count 0 (none)) + super reach A jackpot (pseudo run count 0 (none)) + super reach B jackpot (pseudo run count 0 (none))]. Therefore, it is [0.5 + 1.5 + 2 = 4%], and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "1 pseudo-run" is the ratio of [Normal reach jackpot (1 pseudo-run) + Super reach A jackpot (1 pseudo-run) + Super reach B jackpot (1 pseudo-run)], so [1 + 2 + (2.5 + 3) = 8.5%]. Super reach A jackpot (2 pseudo-runs) + super reach B jackpot (2 pseudo-runs)], so [(2.5+5+6+7+6+7)+(3+7+10+12+10+12)=87.5%].

In this way, regarding the relationship between the variation pattern of "0 pseudo-runs (none)", the variation pattern of "1 pseudo-run", and the variation pattern of "pseudo-runs of 2", the percentage of the display result being a "big hit" is higher in the order of "0 (none) pseudo-runs" < "1 pseudo-run" < "2 pseudo-runs". Therefore, the player expects many pseudo-runs to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the rate at which pseudo-runs are executed and type X is selected as the pseudo-run type is [5.5+3+2.5+2+1.5=14.5%], and the rate at which pseudo-runs are executed and type Y is selected as the pseudo-run type is [2+1.5+1+1.5+1]. +1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0.5=12.5%].

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), the rate at which a pseudo-run is executed and the type X is selected as the type of the pseudo-run is [1+2+2.5+2.5+3=11%], and the rate at which the pseudo-run is executed and the type Y is selected as the type of the pseudo-run is [5+6+7+6+7+3+7+1]. 0+12+10+12=85%].

In this way, the variation pattern in which the type Y pseudo-run is executed has a higher percentage of the display result being a "big win" than the variation pattern in which the type X pseudo-run is executed.

(Production decision processing at the time of start winning)
FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the time of start winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process shown in FIG.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a set of start winning command (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command) based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning port is newly received (step S27TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not a big hit will be determined, among the results of determination at the time of winning. A CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of a big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging a big win and the random number for judging a kind of a big win extracted at the time of start winning, and outputs a pattern designating command designating the judgment result. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. A CPU 103 determines whether normal reach or not, whether or not super reach or not, and whether or not divided performance is executed based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of start winning, and outputs a variation category command designating the result of determination. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display corresponding to the start winning based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning and the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can confirm whether or not the divided effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning before receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of starting winning commands (symbol designating command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designating command) is newly stored in the starting winning command storage area. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received (NO in step S27TM1000), the process is terminated as it is.

If one set of starting winning command is newly received (YES in step S27TM1000), the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute a split performance based on the variable category command received from the CPU 103 (step S27TM1010).

If it is not determined to execute the split effect (NO in step S27TM1010), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM1030. If it is determined to execute a split effect (YES in step S27TM1010), effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag (step S27TM1020), and advances the process to step S27TM1030. The change prohibition flag is set (turned on) at step S27TM1020, and is reset (turned off) at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the received command at the time of starting winning is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S27TM1030). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process ends. If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the final display mode for active display is determined based on the final display mode determination table for active display (see FIG. 9-3(A)) (step S16TM1010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change pattern and whether or not the first change effect is executed and the number of times of execution based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-3(B)) (step S16TM1020).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pending display change pattern based on the pending display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-4) (step S16TM1030), and terminates the process.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2(1) to 10-2(4), the first reserved display 27TM010 is displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011, which is a region different from the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200, regardless of whether the divided effect is being executed, and the active display 27TM030 is displayed in the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200. It is displayed in the active display area 27TM031, which is a different area from any of them.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S16TM1010 to S16TM1030, determines whether or not to execute the first change effect to change the mode of active display or hold display, and can execute the first change effect. On the other hand, when the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process of steps S16TM1010 to S16TM1030 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is, so the first change effect cannot be executed.

In this way, when it is determined to execute the split performance in the determination at the time of start winning, the player's interest can be turned to ``whether or not the split performance is performed'' by not changing the display modes of the pending display and the active display during the period from the time of the start winning to the end of the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning. Also, by not changing the display modes of the pending display and the active display when the split effect is being executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the split effect.

In addition, when it is determined to execute the split performance in the determination at the time of the start winning, it is allowed to change the display mode of the pending display or the active display during the period from the time of the start winning to before the start of the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning (although the first changing performance is executable), but during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the split performance (or during the execution of the split performance), the display modes of the pending display and the active display may not be changed (the first variation performance may be made unexecutable).

Supposing that the display mode of the active display is changed while the split effect is being executed, depending on the timing at which the mode of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 and the display mode of the active display are changed, there is a possibility that the player can easily grasp which image is the first effect image 27TM100 (that is, is it the true image for the player). It is preferable not to perform rendition.

On the other hand, while the variable display accompanied by the split effect is being executed (or the split effect is being executed), the display mode of the pending display may not be changed, but the display mode of the active display may be changed. For example, by making it possible to change the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the split performance, the player can be interested in how the active display changes due to the execution of the split performance.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be capable of executing an action effect acting on the pending display or the active display. For example, the display mode of the pending display or active display hit by the ball may be changed in accordance with execution of the effect effect that the ball thrown by the character hits the pending display or active display.

Then, when it is determined to execute the divided performance in the determination at the time of start winning, the effect performance may not be performed during the period from the time of the start winning to the end of the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning.

When it is determined to execute the divided performance in the determination at the time of start winning, the action performance can be executed in the period from the time of the start winning to before the start of the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning, but the action performance may not be executed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the split performance (or during the execution of the division performance).

Further, when it is determined to execute the divided performance in the determination at the time of start winning, during the period from the time of the start winning to the end of the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning, the display modes of the pending display and the active display are not changed (the first change performance cannot be executed), but the action performance may be executable. For example, although an action effect is executed in which the ball thrown by the character hits the pending display or the active display, as a result, the display mode of the pending display or the active display hit by the ball may not be changed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the effect (effect acting on the pending display or the active display) for changing the display mode of the pending display or the active display is lower during the period during which the divided effect is executed during the variable display than during the period during which the divided effect is not executed during the variable display.

(Specific example of production video)
Next, specific examples of effect moving images will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory view showing an example of [Movie A], which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the split effect is executed, and FIG.

As described above, when the divided effect is executed in this embodiment, a predetermined movie image corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(Specific example of movie A)
As shown in FIG. 10-6(1), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the divided effect, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the pseudo consecutive symbol 27TM300 in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 and the second ornament symbol "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2, and displays the white effect image 27TM400A in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2. At this time, the second decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the second decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<second decorative design.

In the example in which the movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-run effect image 27TM300A described later is not displayed when the pseudo-run pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-run of type X (low expectation) among the types of pseudo-run is executed. In addition, in the example in which Movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A does not have a mode (blue or red) suggesting a set value like the fourth setting suggesting effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first re-variation display of the second decorative design in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (4), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the second decorative symbol "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200 to set the ready-to-win state, and displays the characters "reach!!" above the second effect image 27TM200.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, in the central part of the second performance image 27TM200 while continuing the ready-to-win state. Since the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decoration pattern, it seems to the player that they are displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern.

In this embodiment, the time bar 27TM360 displays 100% of the remaining time at the initial timing when it is displayed, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases as time passes, and the remaining time is displayed as 0% at the timing when the display of the operation prompting display 27TM350 ends.

However, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are merely objects in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern. Actually, the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled even during the display period of the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and the operation is not detected by the operation detecting means of the push sensor 35B.

In this embodiment, when the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, as will be described later, at the timing when the remaining time of the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as 20%, regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is actually operated by the player, the effect image simulating the form of the cut-in notice effect described later is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(5), the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar 27TM360 to the remaining 25% in accordance with the lapse of a predetermined period of time since the time bar 27TM360 was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (6), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 20%, the effect control CPU 120 displays the cut-in image 27TM370A displaying the characters "Chance?" However, the cut-in image displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern. This cut-in image 27TM370A is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

In this way, the cut-in image is displayed regardless of the actual operation at the timing when the remaining operation effective period suggested by the time bar 27TM360 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 reaches a predetermined period (remaining 20%). That is, when the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the same effect as when the push button 31B is actually operated and the operation is detected by the operation detecting means of the push sensor 35B is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and displays an image of a battle effect in which the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) battle. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "Expectation" at the lower center of the image of the battle production, and the number of object images 27TM550 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win. However, the object image 27TM550 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern.

(Specific example of movie B)
As shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the divided effect, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the pseudo consecutive symbol 27TM300 in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 and the second ornament symbol "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2, and displays the white effect image 27TM400A in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2. At this time, the second decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the second decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<second decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A as the second effect image 27TM200.

In the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-run effect image 27TM300A is displayed when the pseudo-run pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-run of type Y (high expectation) among the pseudo-run types is executed. In addition, in the example in which Movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in a mode (blue or red) suggesting a set value like the fourth setting suggesting effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first re-variation display of the second decorative design in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(5), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the second decorative symbol "5" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200 to set the ready-to-win state, and displays the characters "reach!!" above the second effect image 27TM200.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, in the central part of the second performance image 27TM200 while continuing the ready-to-win state. Since the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decoration pattern, it seems to the player that they are displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(6), the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar 27TM360 to the remaining 25% in accordance with the lapse of a predetermined period of time since the time bar 27TM360 was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(7), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 20%, the effect control CPU 120 displays the cut-in image 27TM370B displaying the characters "Chance!" This cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "Battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and displays an image of a battle effect in which the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) battle. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "Expectation" at the lower center of the image of the battle production, and the number of object images 27TM550 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win.

(Playback control of production video)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, there are [movie A (short)], [movie A (long)], [movie B (short)], and [movie B (long)] as effect moving images that can be reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200 corresponding to the variation pattern involving the split effect. FIG. 10-8 is a time chart showing the reproduction period of each effect moving image when the split effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, when [Movie A (Short)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing T0), displays the effect image of [Movie A] shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. Further, when [Movie A (Long)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing T0), displays the effect image of [Movie A] shown in (1) to (7) of FIG. 10-6, and then terminates the display of the effect image of [Movie A] (timing TA2).

Here, the effect images of [Movie A (Short)] (Fig. 10-6 (1) to (3)) and the effect images of the first half of [Movie A (Long)] (Fig. 10-6 (1) to (3)) are common. Therefore, to play back [Movie A (Short)], it is sufficient to execute control to play back the first half of [Movie A (Long)]. Therefore, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores effect data related to [Movie A (Long)], and the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to perform display control of only the first half of [Movie A (Long)] (whether [Movie A (Short)] is played back) or whether to perform display control of the entire portion (Full) of [Movie A (Long)] (whether [Movie A (Long)] is played back) in accordance with the variation pattern designation command, and displays based on the determination. By executing the control, two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

Further, when [Movie B (short)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts the display of the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), displays the effect image of [Movie B] shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. Further, when [Movie B (Long)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts the display of the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and after displaying the effect image of [Movie B] shown in FIGS.

Here, the effect images of [Movie B (Short)] (FIGS. 10-7 (1) to (4)) and the effect images of the first half of [Movie B (Long)] (FIGS. 10-7 (1) to (4)) are common. Therefore, to reproduce [Movie B (Short)], it is sufficient to execute control to reproduce the first half of [Movie B (Long)]. Therefore, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores effect data related to [Movie B (Long)], and the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to perform display control of only the first half of [Movie B (Long)] (whether [Movie B (Short)] is played back) or whether to perform display control of the entire portion (Full) of [Movie B (Long)] (whether [Movie B (Long)] is played back) in accordance with the variation pattern designation command, and displays based on the determination. By executing the control, two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, by providing a plurality of end timings for one effect moving image stored in the ROM 121, it is not necessary to store individual effect moving images for each variation pattern involving division effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented. In addition, by varying the end timing of one effect moving image according to the variation pattern, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if a plurality of effect moving images are prepared.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "loss", the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A (short)" is [1.5+1.5]=3%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is [1+1]=2%. +6]=12%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected is [7+7]=14%. Therefore, when the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected, the ratio of winning big is higher than when the variation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "lost", the rate of selection of the "movie B (short)" variation pattern is [1+1]=2%, and the rate of selection of the "movie B (long)" variation pattern is [0.5+0.5]=1%. 0+10]=20%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected is [12+12]=24%. Therefore, when the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected, the ratio of winning big is higher than when the variation pattern of "movie B (short)" is selected.

Therefore, when the ``movie A'' is reproduced, the longer the reproduction period (the later the end timing), the higher the expectation for the big win. By performing such performance control, once the divided performance is executed (once the movie is reproduced), the player expects that the divided performance will continue as long as possible (the movie will be reproduced as long as possible).

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "loss", the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A" is [1.5+1+1.5+1]=5%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B" is [1+0.5+1+0.5]=3%. is [6+7+6+7]=26%, and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B" is [10+12+10+12]=44%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ratio of winning big hits is higher when movie B, which is a moving image with a relatively long reproduction period, is reproduced than when movie A, which is a moving image with a relatively short reproduction period, is reproduced.

Therefore, the player expects that the movie B will be played back rather than the movie A when the split effect is executed, that is, the effect moving image with a relatively long playback period will be played.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the longer the reproduction period of the effect moving image is, the higher the expectation of the big win is. In addition, an effect configuration may be adopted in which the reproduction period of the effect moving image and the degree of expectation for the big hit are not related (the degree of expectation for the big hit does not change depending on the end timing of the effect moving image).

(Concrete example of pseudo continuous effect)
As the pseudo-continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, as described above, there are a pseudo-continuous effect of type X (hereinafter also referred to as pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak]) and a pseudo-continuous effect of type Y (hereinafter also referred to as pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong]). The ratio of the display result of "big win" is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed than when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. A specific example of the pseudo continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B4).

10-9 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak] is executed, and FIGS. 10-9 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong] is executed.

(Concrete example of pseudo continuous effect [X: Weak])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak], and temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbols to be re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

(Concrete example of pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], and temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 displays a pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in a state in which the decorative symbol "2" is temporarily stopped in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. At this time, the decoration pattern including the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the pseudo-continuous effect image (the display layer is higher than the pseudo-continuous effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<pseudo-continuous effect image<decorative symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body effect in response to execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], and moves the movable body 27TM600 from the tilted position to the standing position. In this example, the movable body 27TM600 is positioned in front of the pseudo continuous pattern 27TM300 by operating the movable body 27TM600 to the standing position. That is, since the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 related to the pseudo-continuous effect and the movable body 27TM600 after the action have a corresponding positional relationship, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is an effect image corresponding to the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 and also an effect image corresponding to the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbols to be re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and moves the movable body 27TM600 from the upright position to the tilted position, thereby ending the movable body effect.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous performance [X: weak] is executed, after the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is not displayed and the movable body performance is not executed, and the re-variation display of the ornamental pattern is executed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body 27TM600 moves from the tilted position to the standing position. Next, the decorative pattern is re-variably displayed, and the movable body 27TM600 moves from the upright position to the tilted position.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 10-9, the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong] is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R while the divided effect is not being executed. There is.

That is, along with the execution of the division effect, the variable display of the first decoration pattern as the decoration identification information is executed in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, and based on the first decoration pattern, either the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed. Further, along with the execution of the divided performance, the variable display of the second decoration pattern as the decoration identification information is executed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second performance image 27TM200, and based on the second decoration pattern, either the pseudo-continuous performance [X: weak] or the pseudo-continuous performance [Y: strong] may be executed.

However, in the present embodiment, in the state where the split effect is not executed (example shown in FIG. 10-9), the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed and the movable body effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong]. The movable body presentation is not executed.

(Outline of setting suggestion production)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can execute a third setting suggesting effect and a fourth setting suggesting effect as setting suggesting effects suggesting the set values of the gaming machine. The gaming machine of the present embodiment can be configured to be capable of executing a third setting suggestion effect and a fourth setting suggestion effect in addition to the first setting suggestion effect and second setting suggestion effect described in [characteristic portion 16TM].

The third setting suggesting performance and the fourth setting suggesting performance are performances of suggesting a set value according to the mode of the displayed effect image by determining the mode of the effect image displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R at different ratios according to the set value at the timing when the decorative patterns are stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R (including the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R) when the divided performance is not executed.

Further, the third setting suggesting effect and the fourth setting suggesting effect determine the mode of the effect image displayed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 at different ratios according to the set value at the timing when the first decorative symbols stop in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (including the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1) when the split effect is executed. This is an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode of the displayed effect image.

In this embodiment, (i) when the variation pattern is "non-reach", the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing when the decorative symbol stops. (ii) When the variation pattern is "normal ready-to-win or super ready-to-win without pseudo-run", the third setting suggesting effect or the fourth setting suggesting effect can be executed at the timing when the same decorative pattern stops in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R and the ready-to-win state occurs (in the case of division effect, the timing when the same first decorative pattern stops in the first pattern display areas 5L1 and 5R1 to enter the ready-to-win state). (iii) When the variation pattern is "Normal Reach or Super Reach with Pseudo-Ren", it is possible to execute the third setting suggesting effect or the fourth setting suggesting effect at the timing when the pseudo-repetitive symbols first temporarily stop in the pattern display area 5C (in the case of division effect, at the timing when the pseudo-repetitive symbols first temporarily stop in the first symbol display area 5C1).

A decorative pattern (including a pseudo-continuous pattern) when the third setting suggesting performance or the fourth setting suggesting performance is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decoration pattern (including the pseudo-continuous pattern), the effect image and the background image when the third setting suggestion performance or the fourth setting suggestion performance is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decoration pattern.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when the third setting suggestive effect is executed, the effect images displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 when the divided effect is executed) are gold, and when the fourth set suggestive effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 when the divided effect is executed). The effect image displayed in is blue or red.

Further, in the present embodiment, when neither the third setting suggestion performance nor the fourth setting suggestion performance is executed, the effect image displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 when the division performance is executed) becomes white.

Thus, by displaying the setting suggesting information (effect image) suggesting the setting value corresponding to the stop position of the decorative pattern, the player pays attention not only to the stopped decorative pattern but also to the setting suggesting information displayed corresponding to the decorative pattern.

Further, in the first embodiment, setting suggestion is not performed in the second effect image 27TM200, and neither the image related to the third setting suggesting effect nor the image related to the fourth setting suggesting effect is displayed as an image in the movie reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200. Therefore, the effect image of the decorative design displayed in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 is white.

(Outline of cut-in notice effect)
Next, the advance notice effect for giving notice that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-13(2) to 10-13(4) to be described later, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid when the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R are in a ready-to-win state when the divided effect is not executed. TM360 is displayed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the screen. When the cut-in announcement effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire central region in the vertical direction of the screen. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decoration pattern, and letters of "Reach!!").

Further, in the present embodiment, when the split effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 provides an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM for notifying the remaining period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in the central portion of the first effect image display area 27TM100A when the ready-to-win state is established with the first decorative symbols in the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1. 360 is displayed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice performance in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the central part of the first performance image display area 27TM100A. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire vertically central region of the first effect image display region 27TM100A. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decoration pattern, and characters of "reach!!") in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(Production decision processing at the time of fluctuation start)
A CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command designating a variation pattern, and a reservation memory number subtraction designation command (a first reservation memory number subtraction designation command or a second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) to a performance control CPU 120 when starting variable display of special symbols.

The effect control CPU 120 designates the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the number of reserved memories has been subtracted when the variable display of the special design (first special design or second special design) is started, the display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or loss, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and the variable display period of the special design and the performance contents (reach and super reach). Based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern designation command from a game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), it is possible to specify that the variable display of special symbols is executed, and the variable display period of special symbols and the contents of performance (reach, super reach, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) is terminated and the display result is derived based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbols is terminated and the display result is determined.

In this embodiment, execution/non-execution of split effect, movie type of split effect (movie A (short), movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)), number of pseudo-runs (0, 1, 2) and type of pseudo-run (type X, type Y) are specified by the variation pattern designation command. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 can determine whether or not to execute the divided performance and the mode of the divided performance when the divided performance is executed, corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern to be executed based on the received variation pattern designation command, and can also determine the number of times of the pseudo-run and the mode of the pseudo-run when the pseudo-run is executed.

FIG. 10-10 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of variation. In this fluctuation start effect determination process, whether or not to execute each of the third set suggestive effect, the fourth set suggestive effect, and the cut-in advance notice effect is determined and the effect mode thereof.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the production control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands (reserved memory number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and variation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) for executing the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols based on the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command. And, the decoration based on the designated variation pattern. The effect to be executed during the variable display of the symbols is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 10-10.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value is "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "6") (step S27TM2000). If the set value is not "6" (that is, if the set value designated by the set value designation command is not "6") (NO in step S27TM2000), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM2030.

When the set value is "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "6") (YES in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the third setting suggestion effect is to be executed based on the third setting suggestion effect execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 10-11(A)), and advances the process to step S27TM2020.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the execution/non-execution determination table of the third setting suggestion effect, the judgment value is assigned so that the third setting suggestion effect is executed only when the set value is "6". When the set value is '6' (that is, when the set value designated by the set value designating command is '6'), the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the third setting suggesting performance at a rate of 99.5%, and decides to execute the third setting suggesting performance at a rate of 0.5%.

Thus, only when the set value is '6' (that is, only when the set value designated by the set value designation command is '6'), whether or not to execute the third setting suggestion performance is determined, and the third setting suggestion performance is executed based on the determination result. When the third setting suggesting performance is executed, the set value set for the game machine is determined to be ``6'', so the player has a great interest in whether or not the third setting suggesting performance is executed, and expects the effect image of the decoration pattern to be displayed in gold.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (step S27TM2020). If it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (YES in step S27TM2020), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM2040.

When it is not decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect (NO in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the fourth setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-11(B)), and advances the process to step S27TM2040.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(B), in the execution/non-execution determination table of the fourth setting suggestion effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned according to the set setting value.

When the setting value is one of '1', '3' and '5' (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is any of '1', '3' and '5'), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 40%, and decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 30%. .

When the set value is one of ``2'', ``4'' and ``6'' (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is one of ``2'', ``4'' and ``6''), the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the fourth setting suggestion performance at a rate of 30%, decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion performance in the blue mode at a rate of 30%, and decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion performance in the red mode at a rate of 40%. .

Thus, when the set value is any one of '1', '3' and '5' (that is, when the set value designated by the set value designation command is any of '1', '3' and '5'), the proportion of the effect image of the decorative pattern displayed in blue is higher than the proportion of the effect image of the decorative pattern displayed in red. On the other hand, when the set value is any of '2', '4' and '6' (that is, when the set value designated by the set value designation command is any of '2', '4' and '6'), the proportion of the effect image of the decorative pattern displayed in red is higher than the proportion of the effect image of the decorative pattern displayed in blue.

Therefore, the fourth setting suggesting rendering in which the blue effect image is displayed is a rendering suggesting that the set value is an odd number (the set value is one of "1", "3" and "5"). Further, the fourth setting suggesting effect in which a red effect image is displayed is a effect suggesting that the set value is an even number (the set value is any one of "2", "4" and "6"). Thus, the fourth setting suggesting effect is an even-odd suggesting effect suggesting whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (step S27TM2040). If the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S27TM2040), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the variation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 10-11(C)) (step S27TM2050), and ends the process.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(C), in the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution determination table, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result designation command.

The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80% when the display result is "miss", decides to execute a cut-in notice effect to display the cut-in image 27TM370A (a cut-in image displaying the characters "chance?") at a rate of 15%, and displays a cut-in notice effect to display the cut-in image 27TM370B (a cut-in image displaying the characters "chance!") at a rate of 8%. It decides to execute it, and decides to execute the cut-in notice effect of displaying the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image displaying the characters "great chance!!") at a rate of 2%.

The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "big hit", decides to execute a cut-in notice effect to display a cut-in image 27TM370A (a cut-in image displaying the characters "chance?") at a rate of 15%, and displays a cut-in picture 27TM370B (a cut-in image displaying the characters "chance!") at a rate of 20%. It decides to execute the effect, and decides to execute the cut-in notice effect of displaying the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image displaying the characters "great chance!!") at a rate of 25%.

(Specific example of the third setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the third setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A3). FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example in which the third setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the decorative symbol stops (timing of (i) described above) when the setting value is "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6") and the variation pattern is the "non-reach out" variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), based on the fact that the variation pattern is "non-reach lost", the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R to stop display the combination of non-reach decorative patterns ("247" in this example) whose display result is "loss", and executes the third setting suggestion effect, and gold effect images 27TM40 are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, respectively. Display 0D.

At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A3), the effect control CPU 120, which has received a command designating to fix and stop the decorative symbols from the main board 11, erases the golden effect image 27TM400D displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby ending the third setting suggestion effect, and in response to the fact that the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is "missing", the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R: A combination of decorative symbols ("247" in this example) that results in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of the first small patterns of '247' in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r based on the fact that the combination of decoration patterns to be fixed and stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is '247'.

(Specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3). FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example in which the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop (timing of (iii) described above) when the setting value is "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6") and the variation pattern is "Normal Reach or Super Reach with Type X Pseudo Reach".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), based on the fact that the variation pattern is "Normal reach or super reach with pseudo-run of type X", the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, respectively, temporarily stops the pseudo-run symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C, and executes the fourth setting suggestion effect in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-run effect [X: Weak].

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the red effect image 27TM400C in each of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the decision to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode.

At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B3), the effect control CPU 120, which has received a command designating to fix and stop the decorative pattern from the main board 11, erases the red effect image 27TM400C displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to end the fourth setting suggestion effect, and executes the re-variation display of the decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special pattern.

(Specific example of cut-in notice effect)
Next, a specific example of the cut-in announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. FIGS. 10-13(1) to 10-13(4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-13, the state of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. The push button mode includes a flashing mode that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (extinguishing mode) that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid.

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

When the effect image shown in FIG. 10-13 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are not displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled, so the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the decoration symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 to bring it into a ready-to-win state, and displays the characters "reach!!" At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 while continuing the ready-to-win state. Since the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decoration pattern, it seems to the player that they are displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern.

A performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 and a time bar 27TM360, and switches the push button 31B from a normal mode (extinguishing mode) to a flashing mode in correspondence with the activation of the operation of the push button 31B (corresponding to the start of the valid period of operation).

In an operation standby state in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (within the operation valid period) but the operation of the push button 31B is not yet detected by the push sensor 35B, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are continuously displayed. When the time bar 27TM360 is initially displayed, the remaining time is displayed as 100%, and the percentage of the remaining time gradually decreases as time elapses in the operation standby state. In this operation standby state, the push button 31B is blinking.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(3), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% in accordance with the lapse of the predetermined period of time in the operation standby state. The push button 31B continues to flash in response to the operation standby state.

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the push button 31B within the operation valid period before the display of the time bar 27TM360 becomes 0%. At this time, the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation standby state ends. The performance control CPU 120 hides (deletes) the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 in response to the termination of the operation standby state, and switches the push button 31B from the flashing mode to the normal mode (extinguishing mode). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13(4), the cut-in announcement effect is executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B within the operation valid period.

In the example of the cut-in notice effect shown in FIG. 10-13(4), the cut-in image 27TM370B displaying the characters "chance!" This cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decoration pattern, and letters of "reach!!"). Further, when the cut-in image is displayed, the push button 31B is in a normal mode (extinguishing mode) corresponding to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid (corresponding to the completion of the operation within the valid period of operation).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another performance is displayed, a cut-in image of a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other performance (a display layer is higher and appears to be displayed on the nearer side than the image related to the other performance) is suddenly displayed, so that the player is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice performance is executed. In addition, since there are a plurality of cut-in images as in this embodiment, the user is also interested in which cut-in image is displayed.

(Setting suggestion effect during execution of split effect)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the divided performance is executed, the setting suggestion performance can be executed in the first performance image display area 27TM100A, while the setting suggestion performance is not executed in the second performance image display region 27TM200A. An example of rendering in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 12-19.

FIG. 10-14 is a time chart showing execution timing of each effect when the split effect is executed, and FIGS.

In this example, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the first pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen, and at the same time, a split effect is performed in which the movie B (long), which has a longer playback period among the types of movie B, is played, and the pseudo-run of type Y with high expectations is performed twice. has been decided.

A performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns based on a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of ``super reach B jackpot [first pattern division performance (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]''. In this variation pattern, during the period in which the split effect is being executed, after the simulated continuous effect [Y: Strong] is executed twice in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, a battle effect B is executed as a super ready-to-win effect to inform whether or not the ally character and the enemy character B battle each other to win a big hit, and the effect image based on the movie B (long) is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left part of the screen. become.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode (step S27TM2030) in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start (step S27TM2030), and decides to execute the cut-in notice effect of displaying the cut-in image 27TM370C displaying the characters "great chance!!" (step S27TM2050).

In FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the state of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. The push button mode includes a flashing mode that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (extinguishing mode) that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid.

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol started at the timing T1 shown in FIG. , the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "0" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 because the second reserved memory number is 0. The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), in the state where the divided effect is not executed and the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) corresponding to the fact that it is not the timing to execute the cut-in notice effect (not the timing to display the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts the divided effect at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-14) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the decorative pattern variation. In this example, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A set in the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A set in the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A, based on the execution of the effect control of the first pattern.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of the first decoration pattern to be executed in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image display area 27TM100A along with the start of the split effect. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces [movie B] in the second effect image display area 27TM200A with the start of the divided effect. Therefore, an effect image based on [Movie B] is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. At this time, based on the reproduced [Movie B], the variable display of the second decorative symbols is executed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2.

Further, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (2) and subsequent figures, in the state where the divided effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) regardless of whether or not it is time to execute the cut-in notice effect (regardless of whether or not it is time to display the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the first decoration pattern of "3" in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing to execute the first pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1, and the red mode fourth setting suggestion effect is executed (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). That is, the red effect image 27TM400C is displayed in each of the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the second decorative symbols of "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 at a predetermined timing when the first pseudo continuous effect is executed by the first decorative symbol (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the second symbol display area 5C2, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

Thus, as the second effect image 27TM200 based on [movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the effect image simulating the effect when it is decided not to execute the third setting suggesting effect and the fourth setting suggesting effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong] while the red effect image 27TM400C is continuously displayed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-14). At this time, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image 27TM400C (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second effect image display area 27TM200A to display the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in a state in which the white effect image 27TM400A is continuously displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 (timing T5 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

Thus, an effect image simulating the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 based on [MOVIE B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9(B3), when the divided effect is not executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed and the movable body effect in which the movable body 27TM600 moves is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], but as shown in FIG. Although TM300A is displayed, the movable body effect is not executed.

In the pseudo continuous performance when the divided performance is not executed, the pseudo continuous pattern 27TM300 temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5C and the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position after the operation are in corresponding positional relationship, so that the player can easily grasp that the movable body performance is executed corresponding to the pseudo continuous performance [Y: strong].

On the other hand, if the movable body performance is executed along with the pseudo-continuous performance while the divided performance is being executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the first performance image 27TM100 and the second performance image 27TM200 the motion of the movable body 27TM600 corresponds to. In addition, the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position further reduces the visibility of the effect image displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A which are smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A. Furthermore, it is necessary to set which effect image, the first effect image 27TM100 or the second effect image 27TM200, the movable body control command for controlling the motion of the movable body 27TM600 is to be associated with, which complicates the effect control.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the divided effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed. Here, since the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the same manner as when the divisional performance is not executed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance [Y: strong], it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort due to ``the movable body 27TM600 does not operate despite the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance [Y: strong].

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variation display of the first decorative symbols in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (timing T6 shown in FIG. 10-14). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes re-variation display of the second decorative symbols in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 based on [MOVIE B] (timing T6 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the first decoration pattern of "3" in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing to execute the second pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] (timing T7 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 (timing T8 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

At this time, effect control CPU 120 displays a ready-to-win state image based on [MOVIE B] in second effect image display area 27TM200A. In this example, the second decorative pattern of "2" is stopped and displayed in the second pattern display area 5L2 and the second pattern display area 5R2 to set the ready-to-win state, and the character "reach!!" timing).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (6) to 10-17 (8), in the state in which the divided effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) regardless of whether the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. Here, in FIG. 10-16(6), it is the second effect image display area 27TM200A that the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and they are merely displayed as images in the movie. Therefore, it is not actually the operation effective period, and even if the player operates the push button 31B, execution control of the cut-in notice effect is not performed in response to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] (timing T9 shown in FIG. 10-14). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is the effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 50%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (8), the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variation display of the first decorative symbols in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 10-14). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is the effect image based on [Movie B], has been updated to the remaining 25%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(9), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the first decorative symbol "3" in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 respectively in the first effect image display area 27TM100A to set the ready-to-win state, displays the characters "reach!!" to display an operation prompting display 27TM350 and a time bar 27TM360 (timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

At this time, at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A is updated to the remaining 20%, the cut-in image 27TM370B displaying the characters "Chance!" 0-14 timing of T11). At this time, a cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A as the effect image based on [MOVIE B].

At the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-14, based on the decision to execute the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and the operation valid period is started. By operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period, a cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. However, in the state where the split effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguished mode) regardless of whether the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when the divided presentation is not executed, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode in response to the display of the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and shifts to the operation valid period. Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 27TM005A corresponding to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation effective period (see FIG. 10-13).

On the other hand, when the divided effect is executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the side of the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the push button 31B does not change from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode, and the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) and shifts to the operation effective period (see FIG. 10-17 (9)). Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponding to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIGS. 10-18 (10) described later).

Further, when the divided effect is executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the side of the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the push button 31B does not change from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode, and does not shift to the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-16 (6)). A cut-in image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A at a predetermined timing regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated.

That is, during the period during which the divided performance is being executed, the push button 31B is kept in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) without being in the lighting mode, regardless of whether the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed or not, and regardless of whether the operation of the push button 31B is valid or not, so that the player cannot easily grasp which image on the left or right is the first performance image 27TM100 (whether it is the true performance).

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during execution of the divided effect. In TM200A, the operation promotion effect may not be executed.

Also, unlike the above example, during execution of the division effect, the operation promotion effect may not be executed in either the first effect image display region 27TM100A or the second effect image display region 27TM200A. For example, when a variation pattern specified by a variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern accompanied by a split performance, the performance control CPU 120 may select another type of advance notice performance without selecting the advance notice performance accompanied by the operation promotion performance in the performance determination processing at the time of variation start. That is, the types of advance notice performance executable when the division performance is not executed include the advance notice performance accompanied by the operation promoting performance, but the types of the notice performance executable when the division performance is executed may not include the advance notice performance accompanied by the operation promotion performance.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed when the divided effect is not executed, the push button 31B is switched from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the lighting mode, but when the divided effect is executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode). Therefore, the light emitting device for changing the mode of the push button 31B (for example, an LED that is installed inside the housing of the push button 31B and emits light during the effective operation period) can be said to be an effect device corresponding to the period in which the divided effect is not executed.

Thus, the effect device corresponding to the period in which the split effect is not executed may not be operated during the variable display period of the variation pattern with the split effect. For example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern not accompanied by a split performance, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the execution of performance using a device for changing the mode of the push button 31B in the performance determination processing at the time of variation start, but when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by the division performance, the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine the execution of performance using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B in the performance determination processing at the time of variation start.

Thus, by not operating the predetermined performance device during the execution period of the split performance (or during the variable display of the variation pattern accompanying the split performance), the player cannot easily grasp which of the left and right images is the first performance image 27TM100, and the interest of the split performance can be improved.

Here, if the light emission control of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED is executed in correspondence with each of the first performance image 27TM100 and the second performance image 27TM200 when the divided performance is being executed, the commands (electrical decoration signals) to the LED control board 14 interfere with each other, which causes a problem that appropriate LED control becomes difficult. In this embodiment, the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B does not emit light during the execution period of the split performance (or during the variable display of the variation pattern accompanying the split performance), thereby preventing such a problem from occurring.

Also, an effect device (for example, a decorative LED or the like) that is operable only when the split effect is being executed (or when the variable display of the variation pattern with the split effect is being executed) may be provided. For example, a first decorative LED which does not emit light when the divided performance is not executed and emits light corresponding to the performance of the first performance image display area 27TM100A when the divided performance is executed and a second decorative LED which does not emit light when the divided performance is not executed and emits light corresponding to the performance of the second performance image display region 27TM200A when the divided performance is executed may be provided. In this way, by providing an effect device dedicated to divided effects, it is possible to prevent the above-described problems from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (10), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "great chance!!" A cut-in notice effect is executed to display the cut-in image 27TM370C in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is continuously displayed as the effect image based on [MOVIE B].

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (11), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the cut-in image 27TM370C displaying the characters "great chance!!" in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (timing T13 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "Chance!" timing). Further, at this time, two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "expectation" in the lower part of the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In this way, images relating to the battle effect of Super Reach A (images of friend character 27TM500 and enemy character A (27TM510A), and two star-shaped object images 27TM550) are displayed as effect images based on [Movie B] being reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (12), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the cut-in image 27TM370C displaying the characters "great chance!!" 14 timing). Further, at this time, four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "Expectation" in the lower portion of the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

Thus, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the images of the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed as effect images corresponding to the battle effect of Super Reach B designated by the variation pattern designation command.

In response to the development of the super ready-to-win effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. The effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100 without enlarging the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period from T14 to T15 shown in FIG. 10-14. During this enlarged display period, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200 and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player).

That is, the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period is in the relationship of the second effect image 27TM200<the first effect image 27TM100, and as the first effect image 27TM100 is enlarged and displayed, the display area of the second effect image 27TM200 is reduced (see FIG. 10-18 (12)). In this way, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is enhanced more than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period. Then, the enlarged first effect image 27TM100 completely covers the second effect image 27TM200, thereby making the second effect image 27TM200 invisible (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (13), the effect control CPU 120 ends the split effect at the timing when the first effect image 27TM100 is expanded to substantially the same size as the effect display area 27TM005A (timing T15 shown in FIG. 10-14). At the timing when the divided performance is finished, the performance display area 27TM005A displays an image of a friend character 27TM500 and an enemy character B (27TM510B) and four star-shaped object images 27TM550 as performance images corresponding to the battle performance of Super Reach B designated by the variation pattern designation command. Furthermore, after the split performance is finished, by blinking four star-shaped object images 27TM550 displayed at the bottom of the screen, the expectation (4 stars) finally selected corresponding to the variable display is notified among a plurality of expectations (2 stars and 4 stars) shown to the player during execution of the split performance.

That is, even after the end of the split effect, the same effect information as the effect information (the images of the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B), and the four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed in the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect continues to be displayed on the screen. You can understand that the performance) is continuing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, a split effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed on the left side of the screen. In the game machine of the first embodiment, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, there are cases where the effect based on the variation pattern designation command and the setting suggestion effect determined based on the effect determination process at the time of variation start are executed, but in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a predetermined movie corresponding to the variation pattern is reproduced, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

If setting suggestion performances are executed for each of the first performance image 27TM100 and the second performance image 27TM200 displayed in parallel on the left and right in a state where the divided performance is being executed, a problem arises that the player is confused as to which set value should be estimated based on the left or right setting suggestion performance. In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, it is possible to make the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM100 different from each other in terms of display information related to the degree of expectation of a big hit, such as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect (twice and once), the mode of the cut-in image (“Big Chance!!” and “Chance!”), and the characters that appear (Character B and Character A). As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the divided presentation.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, based on the selection of the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]", two pseudo-runs are executed in the first effect image 27TM100, whereas only one pseudo-run is executed in the second effect image 27TM200. Further, in the first performance image 27TM100, the characters "big chance!!" with the highest degree of expectation for big win are displayed, while in the second performance image 27TM200, the characters "chance!" with the second highest degree of expectation for big win are displayed. Further, in the first performance image 27TM100, the character B (27TM510B) develops into a super reach B with a high expectation for big win among the super reach, and a character B (27TM510B) appears, whereas in the second performance image 27TM200, a character A (27TM510A) develops into a super reach A with a low expectation for the big win among the super reach, and a character A (27TM510A) appears.

Thus, the first effect image 27TM100 with a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high degree of expectation for a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200 with a shorter display period. This example shows an example where the second effect image 27TM200 is a effect image based on the movie B (long), but in any case of the movie B (short), the movie A (long), and the movie A (short), the first effect image 27TM100 with a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a higher expectation of a big win than the second effect image 27TM200 with a shorter display period.

With such a performance structure, the player has a sense of expectation that the first performance image 27TM100 is the one where the performance information with a high degree of expectation for the big win is displayed, and the interest of the divided performance can be improved.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, descriptions of parts common to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted. Unlike the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment can execute setting suggesting effects in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

FIG. 10-20 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of variation in the second embodiment. As shown in steps S27TM2000 to S27TM2030, the gaming machine of the second embodiment can determine whether or not to execute the third setting suggesting effect and the effect mode of the third setting suggesting effect, and execute the third setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment. Further, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, whether or not to execute the fourth setting suggesting effect and the effect mode of the fourth setting suggesting effect are determined, and the fourth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

Further, as shown in steps S27TM2040 to S27TM2050, the gaming machine of the second embodiment can determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, and execute the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, similarly to the game machine of the first embodiment.

Here, in the variation start time effect determination process of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern involving a split effect (step S27TM3000). Then, if the variation pattern accompanies a split effect (YES in step S27TM3000), the presence or absence of execution of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the fifth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are determined (step S27TM3010).

The fifth setting suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting a set value by the display color of the first effect image frame 27TM110 corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. The fifth setting suggestion effect is also an effect of suggesting a set value by the display color of the second effect image frame 27TM210 corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A1), when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 1, 3, and 5, that is, when the setting is an odd number, it is decided not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 60%, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%, and the fifth setting suggestion effect in blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is determined at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. On the other hand, if the setting value of the gaming machine is any of 2, 4, or 6, that is, if it is an even number setting, it is decided not to execute the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 60%, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%, and the fifth setting of the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is determined at a rate of 30%. It decides to execute the suggestive production.

In this embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white. In addition, when it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestive effect in the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, and when it is determined to execute the fifth set suggestive effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red.

Therefore, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, the player guesses that the set value is highly likely to be an odd number, and when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red, it is highly likely that the set value is an even number. Also, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the first effect image frame 27TM110.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A2), when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 1, 3, and 5, i.e., when the setting is an odd number, it is decided not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 80%, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%, and the fifth setting suggestion effect in blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is determined at a rate of 9%. It is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. On the other hand, when the set value of the gaming machine is any one of 2, 4, and 6, that is, when it is set to an even number, it is decided not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 80%, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%, and the fifth setting suggestion effect in red mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is determined at a rate of 11%. Decide to perform the performance.

In this embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white. In addition, when it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggesting effect in the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, and when it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggesting effect in the red mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

Therefore, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, the player guesses that the set value is highly likely to be an odd number, and when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red, the possibility of the set value is even. Also, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white, it is understood that no set value is suggested in the second effect image frame 27TM210.

In this way, the common points between the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are: (1) when the fifth setting suggestion effect is executed, the effect image frame is displayed in blue or red, but when the fifth setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image frame is displayed in white; If the image frame is displayed in red, there is a high probability that the setting value is an even number.

On the other hand, the execution ratio (40%) of the fifth set suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution ratio (20%) of the fifth set suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, if the first production image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, the ratio is that the set value is an odd number, which is higher than the percentage of the second production image frame 27 tm 210 is higher than that is an odd number, and the ratio is that the first production image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red. If the frame 27TM210 is displayed in red, the set value is higher than the even number.

Thus, the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Also, the ratio of the set value suggested by the fifth setting suggesting performance corresponding to the first performance image 27TM100 corresponding to the actual set value of the game machine is higher than the ratio of the set value suggested by the fifth setting suggesting performance corresponding to the second performance image 27TM200 corresponding to the actual set value of the game machine. That is, the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

In this way, the mode of the fifth setting suggestion performance executed in the first performance image display area 27TM100A and the mode of the fifth setting suggestion performance executed in the second performance image display area 27TM200A can be made different, so that the interest of the setting suggestion performance can be improved.

FIG. 10-22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the fifth setting suggestion effect is executed along with execution of the split effect, and is a diagram corresponding to FIGS. 10-2 (1) and (2) of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-22 (1), before the execution of the split effect, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the variable display of the first special pattern, the decorative pattern (main effect pattern) as decoration identification information is variably displayed. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and is performing the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes two sets of combinations of the background image and the decoration pattern to appear on the performance display area 27TM005A based on the background image and the decoration pattern of the information displayed in the performance display area 27TM005A in accordance with the execution of the divisional performance. One of the combinations becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-22(2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image frame 27TM21 to be displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. 0 and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed. That is, in this example, the first performance information is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second performance information is displayed on the left side of the screen based on the determination to execute the performance control of the first pattern.

Then, in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the first decorative pattern as decoration identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed first special pattern, and in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200, the variably displayed second decorative pattern as the decoration identification information is performed in correspondence with the variably displayed first special pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5 in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-22(2), the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red based on the fact that it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestive effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue based on the fact that it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestive effect in the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

Here, in this example, when the divided effect is executed, both the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed. Not limited to this example, there are cases where the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue or red), while the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white). Also, there is a case where the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue or red), while the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is not executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white).

In addition, there are cases where the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed in a common mode (when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in blue, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in red). .

FIG. 10-23 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when divided effects are executed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 10-14 of the first embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23, similar to the example shown in FIG. 10-14, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol starts, the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Split effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-continuation twice (type Y)]" is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23, in the second embodiment, the fifth setting suggestive effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestive effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 can be executed in parallel while the divided effect is being executed. That is, the fifth setting suggesting performance in the first performance image display area 27TM100A in which the performance with high expectation of big hit is executed is high, and the fifth setting suggesting performance in the second performance image display region 27TM200A in which the performance with low expectation is highly executed can be executed in parallel.

FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the divided effect of the second embodiment ends. FIG. 10-24 (12) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-18 (12) of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10-24 (13) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-19 (13) of the first embodiment.

A performance control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the first performance image 27TM100 together with the first performance image frame 27TM110 in which the fifth setting suggestive performance of the red mode is executed in response to the development of the super ready-to-win performance in the first performance image display area 27TM100A. The effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 in which the fifth setting suggesting effect of the red mode is executed without enlarging the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 in which the fifth setting suggesting effect of the blue mode is executed in the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIG. 10-14. During this enlarged display period, the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200, and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player).

That is, the display priority of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period is in the relationship of the second effect image frame 27TM210<the first effect image frame 27TM110, and as the first effect image frame 27TM110 is enlarged and displayed, the displayed area of the second effect image frame 27TM210 shrinks (see FIG. 10-24 (12)). In this way, the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image frame 27TM110 is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period. Then, the enlarged first effect image frame 27TM110 completely covers the second effect image frame 27TM210, thereby making the second effect image frame 27TM210 invisible (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (13), the effect control CPU 120 ends the split effect at the timing when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is enlarged to substantially the same size as the frame of the effect display area 27TM005A (timing T15 shown in FIG. 10-23).

As described above, when the divided performance is executed, the setting suggestive performance can be executed in both the first performance image display region 27TM100A and the second performance image display region 27TM200A, thereby improving the interest of the divided performance and the setting suggestive performance. Here, since the mode of the setting suggesting performance executed in the first performance image display area 27TM100A and the mode of the setting suggesting performance executed in the second performance image display area 27TM200A can be made different, the interest of the setting suggesting performance executed in parallel in the split performance can be further improved.

However, in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmation effect) suggesting that the set value is "6" is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

Supposing that a third setting suggesting effect suggesting a high set value is executed corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 having a short display period and a high probability of execution of a performance with a low degree of expectation, the player may be discouraged by the second effect image 27TM200 not being displayed at an early timing when the third setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is not executed. Also, the player has doubts about the reliability of the third setting suggesting effect executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200. In this embodiment, although the fifth setting suggesting performance can be executed corresponding to the second performance image 27TM200, the third setting suggesting performance suggesting a specific set value with high reliability is not executed, thereby preventing such a problem from occurring.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 27TM)
Next, a modified example of the [characteristic part 27TM] will be described.

(1) As shown in the characteristic portion 16TM described above, the setting suggestion effect may suggest a setting value by the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may display a mini-slot 16TM030 in a special effect area 16TM035 provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5 and below the active display 16TM003, and execute the setting suggesting effect by variably displaying the mini-slot 16TM030.

As described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first setting suggesting effect as the effect suggesting the currently set setting value. This first setting suggesting performance is a performance of establishing the role of ``Bell'' by stop-displaying the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell] and [Bell] as combinations of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. That is, the player recognizes that the first setting suggesting performance for suggesting the set value is executed based on the stop display of the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6(G) described above, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the processing for determining the effect at the time of starting the variation is executed each time the variable display is performed, so whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is to be executed is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the above-mentioned first mini-slot variable display is [Bell] or "Loss". Thus, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggesting performance is executed each time the variable display is executed, and also becomes interested in the number of times the first set suggesting performance is executed with respect to the number of times the variable display is executed (execution ratio of the first set suggesting performance).

In this way, the configuration that can execute the first setting suggestion effect can be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment or the gaming machine of the second embodiment. However, while the first setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed during the period when the divided effect is being executed, the first setting suggesting effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed.

Since the first setting suggesting performance suggests the set value by the number of times of its execution, it is difficult for the player to guess the set value only by looking at the combination of the variable display of the displayed mini-slot. Due to such characteristics of the first setting suggestion performance, if the first mini-slot corresponding to the first performance image 27TM100 and the second mini-slot corresponding to the second performance image 27TM200 are displayed during execution of the split performance, and the first setting suggestion performance is executed in parallel in the first mini-slot and the second mini-slot, the player will be confused. Therefore, it is assumed that the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed while the divided effect is being executed.

(2) It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode shown in the above modified example (1), and neither the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 nor the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 may be executed during the variable display period based on the variation pattern with the split effect.

For example, in the variable display period based on the variation pattern with the split effect, the period during which the split effect is not executed (the period before the execution of the split effect and the period after the execution of the split effect) is the mini-slot 16TM030 displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5 (area corresponding to neither the first effect image display area 27TM100A nor the second effect image display area 27TM200A). Although one set suggestion performance can be executed, neither the first set suggestion performance corresponding to the first performance image 27TM100 nor the first set suggestion performance corresponding to the second performance image 27TM200 may be executed during the execution period of the split performance.

Thus, if the first production image display area 27TM100A and the second production image display area 27TM200A are not supported, if the mini slot 16 tm030 is displayed, the mini slot 16 tm030 is displayed, the mini slot 16 tm030 mini slot is mini slot. Direction display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 may continue to execute the fluctuation display of the mini slot pattern so that the mini slot pattern is not stopped. With such effect control, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed within the effect display area 27TM005A (entire screen) during the execution period of the split effect.

(3) In addition, in the above-described first and second embodiments, an example is shown in which any type of setting suggestion effect can be executed in at least one of the first effect image display region 27TM100A and the second effect image display region 27TM200A during the execution period of the split effect. In both the effect image display areas of A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

Note that during the execution period of the split effect (or during the variable display period based on the variation pattern with the split effect), the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type in the effect display area 27TM005A (entire screen) including the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the rate of change in the display mode of the active display is lower during the period when the split effect is performed than during the period when the split effect is not performed. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in how the active display changes in response to the execution of the split effect.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the setting value of the gaming machine has been described. For example, when the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode for changing the set value when the power of the game machine is turned on, the predetermined setting suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the game machine is not controlled to the setting change mode when the power of the game machine is turned on.

(6) In the above-described second embodiment, there are types of setting suggesting effects that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (third setting suggesting effect, fourth setting suggesting effect, fifth setting suggesting effect) and types of setting suggesting effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A (fifth setting suggesting effect). An example has been described in which while there are types of suggesting effects (third set suggesting effect, fourth set suggesting effect), there are no types of setting suggesting effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

Without being limited to such a form, it is also possible to provide a type of setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but is not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. For example, the fifth setting suggestion effect may be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, but may not be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(7) In the above embodiment, effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, etc.) that can be executed only in one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (for example, the first effect image display area 27TM100A) and are not executed in the other area (for example, the second effect image display area 27TM200A) have been described. can also be executed in the other region, and may be executed at a lower rate in the other region than in the other region.

(8) The game machine shown in the above embodiment, for example, similar to the game machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-191660, includes a display body (for example, an image liquid crystal panel) capable of horizontally arranging and displaying a right eye image (R) and a left eye image (L) for forming a stereoscopic image; A stereoscopic image display means (eg, image display device 5) having a parallax forming body (eg, lenticular sheet) for preventing visual recognition of the image (L) may be provided.

Here, it is assumed that the ROM of the effect control board stores image data of a stereoscopic image (for stereoscopic viewing) (image data of the image for the right eye (R) and image data of the image for the left eye (L)) and image data of a non-stereoscopic image (for planar viewing). The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the VDP) can perform a first control for displaying the image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) alternately arranged in the horizontal direction on the display based on the image data of the stereoscopic image, and a second control for displaying the non-stereoscopic image on the display based on the image data of the non-stereoscopic image.

When the display control means executes the first control, only the right-eye image (R) is visually recognized from the player's right eye without the left-eye image (L) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body, and only the left-eye image (L) is visually recognized from the player's left eye without the right-eye image (R) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body. Stereoscopic vision based on the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye is made possible by the effect of generating a fusion image at the intersection of a straight line connecting the player's right eye and the right eye image (right eye line of sight) and a straight line connecting the player's left eye and left eye image (left eye line of sight).

On the other hand, when the display control means executes the second control, no parallax is formed between the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's left eye. As a result, the intersection of a straight line connecting the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image (right-eye line of sight) and a straight line connecting the player's left eye and the non-stereoscopic image (left-eye line of sight) coincides with the display position of the non-stereoscopic image, resulting in a planar view state. For example, a predetermined (single) right-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image, and a predetermined (single) left-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image.

In a game machine provided with display control means capable of switching between the state of executing the first control and the state of executing the second control in this way, during the execution period of the split performance (or during the fluctuation period based on the variation pattern accompanying the split performance), the first control may not be executed and the second control may be executed. For example, during the execution period of the split effect shown in FIG. 10-14 or FIG. 10-23 (period from T2 to T15), the second control is executed without executing the first control, and the second control may be switched to the first control at the timing of displaying the battle effect image (for example, the image shown in (13) in FIG. 10-19 or (13) in FIG. 10-24) (stereoscopic viewing is possible) after the end of the split effect.

If the first control is performed while the divided performance is being executed to enable stereoscopic vision, it is necessary to prepare in advance the image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) that generate a fusion image having an appropriate depth in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) of the screen as viewed from the player for both the first performance image 27TM100 and the second performance image 27TM200 so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort. In the present embodiment, by not executing the first control that enables stereoscopic vision when the split effect is being executed, the effect data to be prepared is prevented from excessively increasing.

(Details of display control unit)
Next, a detailed description will be given of a configuration for executing the divided effects shown in the above [Description of Characteristic Portion 27TM]. FIG. 10-25 is a configuration diagram showing the display control unit 123. As shown in FIG. A rendering circuit 1510 in a VDP (Video Display Processor) 150 reads necessary image data from the CGROM 160 via a CG bus interface 1530 and outputs it to a decoder 1550 when a display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 160. The CGROM 160 stores image data encoded (data compressed) according to MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) or the like. The decoder 1550 decompresses the image data read from the CGROM 160 and writes the decompressed image data into the drawing material data RAM 1560 .

The drawing circuit 1510 uses the image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying one frame of image on the image display device 5 and writes it to the drawing area of the VRAM (Video RAM) 170 . In this embodiment, an object to be displayed, which is formed by a set of polygons, is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and frame image data is generated according to an image obtained by projecting the object onto a virtual screen by rendering processing. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals to the image display device 5 based on the frame image data in the drawing area. The image display device 5 performs screen display by, for example, a dot matrix system that drives a large number of picture elements (pixels).

The VDP 1500 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM 160 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory.

Next, display modes of effect images using three-dimensional object images will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-26 to 10-30. As shown in FIG. 10-26, when drawing an object image, the VDP 1500 in the display control unit 123 arranges an object OB to be displayed, which is formed by a set of polygons, in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, performs texture mapping on the object, and performs rendering processing to project an image onto a virtual screen SC arranged at a predetermined distance from the viewpoint EY, assuming that the object is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint EY (for example, the viewpoint EY0). IM is obtained by arithmetic processing, and this image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the driving circuit 180 (see FIG. 10-25). In this embodiment, the image IM projected onto the virtual screen SC is rendered by perspective projection.

In the following description, the x-axis is the axis in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction of the screen), and the direction from the origin (0, 0, 0) to the right of the screen is the positive direction, and the direction from the origin (0, 0, 0) to the left of the screen is the negative direction. The y-axis is the vertical direction (vertical direction of the screen), and the direction from the origin (0, 0, 0) to the top of the screen is the positive direction, and the direction from the origin (0, 0, 0) to the bottom of the screen is the negative direction. In addition, the z-axis is the axis in the vertical direction (depth direction of the screen) perpendicular to the screen.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 performs texture mapping on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space based on the effect image EG (an example of an image that imitates the effect display area 27TM005A) in which the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner (FIG. 10-27 (1)). Synthesize (map) the EG. As a result, the xy plane of the object OB and the effect image EG are integrated in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (FIG. 10-27 (2)). Therefore, after the texture mapping, the rendering process for the object OB is executed, and the same rendering process is executed for the effect image EG.

The drawing of the object image when performing the variable display of the effect symbols is performed when the display control section 123 is controlled according to the contents of the process data. The effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the contents of the process data. The display control unit 123 includes information specifying the data of the object OB to be displayed at that timing. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 selects the data of the object OB to be displayed from the CGROM 160 according to the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 . Here, the data of the object OB includes the position information of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the coordinate information of the polygon forming the object OB, the coordinate information of the texture, and the like. Data of the selected object OB to be displayed is stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 . The data of the selected object OB to be displayed is added with information (effect designation information) indicating which effect the data of the object OB corresponds to. A performance control CPU 120 determines whether the image data of the selected object OB to be displayed is a performance image object or another background object based on the performance designation information, and draws the object OB using a drawing circuit 1510.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, a set of left, middle, and right decoration patterns are variably displayed in the effect image EG synthesized on the xy plane of the object OB. By changing (deforming or moving) the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the effect image EG in which a set of left, middle and right decoration patterns is displayed is also changed (deformed or moved). As a result, the aspect of the drawn object image (for example, the length and angle of the displayed straight line) changes, and accordingly the aspect of the displayed decorative pattern (for example, the size and aspect ratio of the displayed decorative pattern) also changes.

FIG. 10-28 shows an example of changing the position of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space by rotating the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space around the y-axis. FIG. 10-28(A) is a diagram showing an initial state when a cuboid object OB having an xy plane is synthesized with the effect image EG in the virtual three-dimensional space. FIG. 10-28 (B1) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the synthesis processing is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis. FIG. 10-28 (B2) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the compositing process is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when drawing an object image, a viewpoint (for example, a viewpoint EY0) corresponding to the object OB is set. The viewpoint EY0 in this example is set at a position facing the xy plane of the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, and the line of sight is set to be parallel to the z-axis. That is, the viewpoint EY0 is set to be the same as the viewpoint when the player views the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

The viewpoint EY0 shown in the example of FIGS. 10-29 is located at the midpoint (o/2, p/2) where the xy plane coordinates of the object OB in the initial state shown in FIG. That is, the viewpoint EY0 corresponding to the object OB in this example is positioned at a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space.

The object OB is rendered as an image obtained by perspective projection onto the virtual screen SC, assuming that it is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. Therefore, when the synthesized object OB is in the initial state, as shown in FIG. 28A, an image is displayed in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are of the same size. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. Further, when the combined object OG is rotated 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG.

As described above, the VDP 1500 in the display control unit 123 performs texture mapping based on the effect image EG on the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional space as a synthesizing process, and changes (deforms or moves) the texture-mapped object OB, thereby generating an image IM by drawing an image of the three-dimensional object OB after the change (deformation or movement) when viewed from the viewpoint EY0 by perspective projection. As a result, the generated image IM naturally reflects the display mode after the effect image EG mapped to the object OB is changed (deformed or moved). Therefore, the processing load of the display control unit 123 can be reduced compared to the case where the display mode of the effect image EG is sequentially calculated based only on the data of the effect image EG which is not associated with the data of the object OB.

Note that in the example of FIG. 10-29, the viewpoint EY0 is a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The position of the viewpoint to be set may be changed according to the game state, the variation pattern, the advance notice effect, the degree of expectation for the big hit, and the like, without being limited to such a form. Also, when arranging a plurality of objects OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, a corresponding viewpoint may be set for each object OB. For example, as shown below, when two objects OB1 and OB2 are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint EY1 corresponding to the object OB1 and a viewpoint EY2 corresponding to the object OB2 may be set so that an image obtained when the object OB1 is viewed from the viewpoint EY1 is drawn, and an image obtained when the object OB2 is viewed from the viewpoint EY2 is drawn.

For example, when the division effect described above is executed, the VDP 1500 executes the first synthesizing process of synthesizing the effect image EG1 in which the first decoration pattern is displayed with the xy plane of the cuboid object OB1 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. Then, the object OB1 subjected to the first synthesis process is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28B2), and the image IM1 (the image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is generated by drawing the image of the rotated object OB1 as seen from the viewpoint EY1 by perspective projection. The VDP 1500 also executes a second synthesizing process of synthesizing the effect image EG2 displaying the second decorative pattern with the xy plane of the cuboid object OB2 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. Then, the object OB2 subjected to the second synthesis process is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28B1), and the image IM2 (the image corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200) is generated by drawing the image of the rotated object OB2 as seen from the viewpoint EY2 by perspective projection.

Then, the VDP 1500 performs display control to superimpose the image IM1 on the right side of the background image and display the image IM2 on the left side of the background image, so that, for example, as shown in FIG.

Here, when the image IM1 is generated by drawing the image of the changed (rotated) object OB1 as viewed from the viewpoint EY1 by perspective projection, the viewpoint EY1 is positioned at a fixed point (p1, q1, r1) [p1, q1, r1 are real numbers, r1 < 0, and |r|<|r1|] in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. An image IM1 is generated by rendering by perspective projection (∵|r|<|r1|). As a result, the image IM1 (the image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A which is smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A.

Similarly, when an image IM2 is generated by rendering an image of the changed (rotated) object OB2 as viewed from the viewpoint EY2 by perspective projection, the viewpoint EY2 is positioned at a fixed point (p2, q2, r2) [p2, q2, r2 are real numbers, r2 < 0, and |r|<|r2|] in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. An image IM2 is generated by rendering by perspective projection (∵|r|<|r2|). As a result, image IM2 (image corresponding to second effect image 27TM200) is displayed in second effect image display area 27TM200A, which is an area smaller than the entire screen of image display device 5. FIG.

In the example of the split effect described above, as a mode in which viewpoints are arranged and drawn in the virtual three-dimensional space, a multi-viewpoint drawing mode is adopted in which an image obtained when viewed from a plurality of viewpoints (in this example, two viewpoints EY1 and EY2) corresponding to each of a plurality of objects (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) is drawn. A drawing mode of a one-viewpoint drawing mode may be adopted in which an image obtained when the images are drawn is drawn.

In the present embodiment, synthesis processing (texture mapping) is performed to synthesize the effect image EG corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols on the xy plane on the z-axis negative direction side (front side of the screen) of the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, the object OB subjected to the synthesis processing is changed (deformed or moved), and the image of the changed (deformed or moved) object OB viewed from the viewpoint EY0 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM. Although this example is shown, the image IM3 may be generated by performing a synthesis process (texture mapping) for synthesizing a background image on the xy plane on the z-axis positive direction side (back side of the screen) of the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, changing (deforming or moving) the object OB subjected to the synthesizing process, and drawing an image of the changed (deformed or moved) object OB as viewed from the viewpoint EY3 by perspective projection.

In this way, by changing (transforming or moving) the object OB in a state where the background image is combined with the object OB, it is possible to execute the shake vision performance for changing the mode of the background image displayed on the entire screen of the performance display area 27TM005A of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Note that the shake vision effect described above has not only the effect of changing the aspect of the background image synthesized with the object OB, but also the effect of changing the aspect of the effect image EG synthesized with the same object OB. This shake vision performance may be executed as a performance suggesting the end of the performance being executed, may be executed as a performance when the execution period of the performance being executed becomes longer than a prescribed period, or may be executed as a chance-up performance suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

In the above-described embodiment, the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 of the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command reproduces a predetermined movie (movie A (short), movie A (long), movie B (short), or movie B (long)) corresponding to the specified variation pattern as the second effect image 27TM200. Here, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the second effect image 27TM200 may be displayed without performing a synthesizing process for synthesizing the original image (for example, IM2) for forming the second effect image 27TM200 with the three-dimensional object OB2 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space.

For example, the first movie in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in the largest size, the middle decorative pattern in the second largest size, and the left decorative pattern in the smallest size, and the second movie in which the left decorative pattern is displayed in the largest size, the middle decorative pattern in the second largest size, and the right decorative pattern in the smallest size are prepared in advance (stored in the ROM of the performance control board in association with the variation pattern). When the divided effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed on the right part of the background image, and the first movie is reproduced within the range of the second effect image frame 27TM210. The second movie is played within the range of 210 .

In this way, the second effect image 27TM200 may be displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. Also, the first effect image 27TM100 may be displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. Further, within the variable display period (or within the divided rendering period) accompanied by the split rendering, the period during which the display control for generating the image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is executed and the period during which the display control for superimposing and displaying the predetermined rendering image EG (for example, the image of the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) on the background image without performing the image generation based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space may be switched.

In addition to moving (rotating) the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z), the object OB may be deformed. For example, the rectangular parallelepiped object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z) may be transformed into a cube by changing the coordinates of the vertices of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB. Alternatively, the rectangular parallelepiped object OB may be divided into two rectangular parallelepiped objects OB, one of the divided rectangular parallelepiped objects OB may be combined with an image corresponding to the first effect image frame 27T110, and the other divided rectangular parallelepiped object OB may be combined with an image corresponding to the second effect image frame 27TM210.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The game machine of the present invention is also a game machine (pachinko game machine 1) equipped with an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM), wherein a three-dimensional object (object OB) is arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) viewed from a specific viewpoint is drawn by perspective projection, thereby generating an effect image (image IM) (display control unit 12). 3 VDP 1500), and the image generating means (the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) performs a predetermined process (synthesis process) of associating a predetermined image (effect image EG) imitating the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display device (image display device 5) with a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and the predetermined process (synthesis process) is performed. A three-dimensional object (object OB) is changed (deformed or moved), and an effect image (image IM) is generated by drawing an image of the three-dimensional object after the change when viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) by perspective projection, the predetermined image (effect image EG) includes update information (first effect information, second effect information) to be updated, and can be displayed on the image display device (image display device 5) as the effect image (image IM) without performing the predetermined process (compositing process). The image generating means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) performs texture mapping based on the predetermined image (effect image EG) on a three-dimensional object (object OB) placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space) as the predetermined processing (combining processing), changes (transforms or moves) the three-dimensional object subjected to the texture mapping, and creates a transparent image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) after the change when viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0). Effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for regenerating a effect image (image IM) by rendering by perspective projection, and furthermore, displaying a moving image added with a character image; and moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling the display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area, and a character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area. text image, etc.) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information), and the character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (see, for example, FIG. 16-7).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. Also, the processing load on the image generating means can be reduced. Appropriate display control is also possible.

That is, the image generating means performs a predetermined process of associating a predetermined image imitating the effect display area of the image display device with a three-dimensional object placed in the virtual space, changes the three-dimensional object subjected to the predetermined process, and generates the effect image by drawing an image of the three-dimensional object after the change when viewed from a specific viewpoint by perspective projection. By changing the first component and the second component in the display period, it is possible to prevent an increase in the control load for displaying the moving image and difficulty in recognizing the character image as much as possible and perform appropriate display control. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine which, when installed in a game arcade, can easily recognize the displayed character image and has an interesting effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of an effect by changing the display mode of the effect display area and enabling appropriate display control, a game machine capable of executing a game (e.g. pachinko game machine 1, etc.) is capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, and effect execution means (e.g., effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g. reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) and data related to the moving image are stored. a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images; moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144) for controlling display of moving images using data in the first storage area; 143, text image renderer 91AK146, etc.), the data in the second storage area includes data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element (for example, a text image designated by text image designation information) and a second constituent element (for example, a display style set by text display setting information), and the character image control means can change the first constituent element and the second constituent element during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (for example, FIG. 16- 7) gaming machines. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Basic description as a premise of the characterizing part of the present embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the premise of the later-described characterizing portion, will be described with reference to the differences from FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above. Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1, which is the premise of the feature part, is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.

FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine, and the main difference from FIG. In addition, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at the position where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 includes an LED.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lighting/lighting-out mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 9014 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The lamp control board 9014 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to that of FIG. 3 described above receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), starting information (information indicating the number of starting winning prizes, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability variation, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, is output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9025). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 12 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment processing (step S90101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as occurrence of start winning, number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to a performance control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S90115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". The process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of judging whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot open post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state passes, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pretreatment of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This processing during the opening of the small winning prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big prize winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time or the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the rear surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state housed in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Although not shown, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting switch functioning as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an open sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display portions of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the kind of big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value although the big win probability is constant. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIGS. 14-1(A) and 14-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 14-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 14-2 (A) shows a configuration example of the second special figure display result determination table used when the variation special figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set as the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to the use of individual display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1237 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result are assigned to ``big win'' in the range of 1020 to 1346, assigned to ``small hit'' in the range of 32767 to 33094, and assigned to ``losing'' in other numerical ranges. Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1237 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1346 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

Among cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1253 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1253 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1383 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''.

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1272 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1429 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1272 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1429 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1292 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1487 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1292 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''. Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1487 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1317 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1556 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1317 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1556 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''.

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1346 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''. Among cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to ``big hit'' in the range of 1020 to 1674, assigned to ``small hit'' in the range of 32767 to 33094, and assigned to ``losing'' in other numerical ranges. When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1346 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''. Among cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1674 for ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 for ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges for ``losing''.

In each display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of 'big win'. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state (for example, 1/300 if the set value is 1, 1/280 if the set value is 2, 1/260 if the set value is 3, 1/240 if the set value is 4, and the set value is 4). 1/220 in the case of 5, 1/200 in the case of a set value of 6), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot game state is higher (for example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and the set value. 1/100 when is 6). In each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big winning game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big winning game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state) than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times. The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is 1.625 times), and the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state at each set value may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is 'small win' and controlled to the small win game state has the same value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state. The probability of being determined is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' and controlling it to the small win game state is the same value different from the first special figure display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the probability of determining the special figure display result as 'small hit' and controlling to the small winning game state is not limited to the same probability, and the probability of determining the special figure display result as 'small win' and controlling to the small winning game state may be varied according to the set value. The probability of determining to control the special figure display result as a 'small win' according to the variable special figure is not limited to a different form, and the probability of deciding to control the special figure display result as a ``small win'' to the small winning game state regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

FIGS. 14-2 to 14-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 14-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 14-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 14-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 14-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) when the set value is 6. . This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, when the set value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the ``jackpot'' among the hit determination values which can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, while when the set value is 2 or more, the values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common value range are assigned to the ``jackpot''. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, like the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) when the set value is 6. . This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 14-4, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6. Thus, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. If the setting value is 6, in this case, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the assignment value is set in the large hit value, but the small hit judgment value is different from the range of the large hit judgment value in the case of set value 6 (1020 to 1346). The value (small hit reference value) is set in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 14-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. If the setting value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the assigned value is set in the scope of the jackpot, but the small hit judgment value is the standard for the small hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). The value (small hit reference value) is set in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the determination value included within a continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit determination value of 1020 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and set value, the determination value included within the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit determination value of 32767 is set as the numerical range of the small hit determination value. It's like

In each display result determination table, when the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same). In addition, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is 655, which is about double). 2767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest, and the larger the value of the setting value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state increases. ). A CPU 103 refers to a display result determination table corresponding to a set value set at that time, and determines a big win (big win A to big win C) with respect to a special pattern when the value of the random number MR1 matches any one of the win judgment values corresponding to the big win. Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 14-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big win means to decide whether to control to a big win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether to make a stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means to decide whether or not to control to a small win game state, but it also means to decide whether to make the stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a small win pattern.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the form in which a total of six set values from 1 to 6 are provided, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of big win, the easier the determination of a specific kind of big win, etc.).

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form in which it does not change, and the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the variable probability state is 65% (so-called variable loop type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game balls pass through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big win game. Based on this, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a variable probability state, and the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big win game is changed according to the variable special figure (so-called V probability variable type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the big win probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game ball is a special variable winning ball device during high base (during time reduction control). It is good also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed type) which controls to a jackpot game state based on passing the predetermined switch provided in 7. FIG. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but a setting (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided while the probability of a big win or a small win is higher than when the set value is any one of 1 to 3, while the number of winning balls obtainable during the big win game is small. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 14-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to disabled, stack pointer setting, built-in device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, RAM 102 may be executed after initial setting such as setting to be accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. If the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), the process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of step S2A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed and the process proceeds to step S8A, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), a set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is performed and the process proceeds to step S8A. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value changing process is a process performed by turning on a lock switch and a clear switch in a state where the game machine frame is opened when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning off the power once. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, a process of updating and storing the temporary set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 according to the state of the lock switch, and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12.

The set value confirmation process is a process performed by turning ON the lock switch 207SG051 (clear switch is OFF) in a state where the game machine frame is opened when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned OFF once. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of starting the display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor, a process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1, ending the display etc. according to the state of the lock switch, and a process of transmitting a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12.

In the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator start lighting from the start of each process, and the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B and the right hand hitting lamp start blinking. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the process proceeds to step S10A without executing the RAM clear process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started by cold start or whether it was restored to the state before power failure (started by hot start) according to whether or not a RAM clear flag is set, performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, "00H" is stored in an address other than the top address (F000) where the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is stored, thereby clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, after F003 among addresses F000 to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Further, the processing in the game control main processing may include, for example, the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, or the like. Furthermore, as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal set value error or the recovery from a power failure during setting change, a process of displaying "E." in each of the first, second, third, and fourth display units constituting the display monitor may be performed. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and outputs a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. Thereafter, the CPU 103 continues until power failure of the pachinko game machine 1 occurs (until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of the game hall clerk, etc.). Error occurrence notification may be performed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the processing in the game control main processing, when it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A and then the open sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, since the operation of the lock switch is detected without detecting the opening of the game machine frame, an error designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Thus, on the performance control board 12 side, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of the error, so that the staff of the game parlor or the like can recognize the occurrence of the error or the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game parlor to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value.

As described above, in the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the range from 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. It is necessary to determine whether As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

Since the numerical range of the big win determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is not necessary to execute the judgment of whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the big win determination value (whether or not to control to the big win game state) a plurality of times as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a short time state, or a variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Whether it is within the numerical range to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability change state. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table for the first special figure is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table for the second special figure is 655, which is about double. ) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small winning game state, it is necessary to determine whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small winning determination value according to the variable special figure. Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value, and when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small winning game state, it is necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variable special figure. Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic portion 60AK, the number-of-times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes, as executable performances, a foretelling performance for foretelling control to the big winning game state, a value reporting performance for notifying whether or not control is to be performed for the probability variable state after the big winning game state is finished, and a setting suggesting performance for suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

FIG. 15-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decoration pattern as a display result of variable display of decoration patterns, and can be determined based on variable display contents such as a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 and a display result of variable display indicated by a variable display result notification command. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the variable pattern and the display result of the variable display should include ``non-reach (loss)'', ``normal reach (loss)'', ``super reach (loss)'', ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', and ``probability variation (big hit)''. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is collectively called "big hit".

When the variable display content is ``non-reach (loss)'', the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win state, the determined decoration pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is ``loss''. When the variable display content is ``ready (losing)'', after the variable display state of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decoration pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing''. When the variable display content is ``normal reach (loss)'' among the variable display contents of ``ready (loss)'', the ready-to-reach performance by the ``normal'' variation pattern is executed, and when the variable display content is ``super reach (loss)'', the ready-to-reach performance by the ``super'' variation pattern is performed. When the contents of the variable display are ``non-probability variable (big win)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big win'', and the game state after the big win game state is finished becomes a time saving state corresponding to the ``non-probability variable'' of the big win type. When the variable display content is ``variable probability (big win)'', the display result of the variable display becomes ``big win'', and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable definite state corresponding to the type of big win corresponding to ``variable probability''. When the game state becomes a probability variable state, the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a ``big win'' and is easily controlled to the big win game state as an advantageous state, so that a game value more advantageous to the player than in the normal state or the time saving state is imparted.

The final stop pattern is determined so that the ``left'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decoration patterns when the variable display content is ``non-reach (loss)''. In this case, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized pattern updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a prepared left finalized pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the left finalized decorative pattern to be stop-displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined among the finalized decorative patterns. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined pattern updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and a right determined decorative pattern to be stop-displayed in a "right" decorative pattern display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative patterns is determined by referring to a prepared right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. - 特許庁At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data representing the random number value for determining the medium-definite pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the medium-fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined by referring to the medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared.

The final stop pattern is determined so that the same (matching) decorative pattern is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". In this case, by extracting the numerical data representing the random number value for determining the left/right determined pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the left/right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number to be stopped and displayed together in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined among the determined decorative patterns. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-definite pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the medium-fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined by referring to the medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative pattern becomes a big winning combination, an arbitrary value (for example, "1") may be added or subtracted from the pattern number of the medium fixed decorative pattern so that the fixed decorative pattern does not become a big winning combination but becomes a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern in the ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R when the variable display contents are ``non-probability variation (big win)'' or ``probability variation (big win)''. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a jackpot determination pattern preliminarily stored and prepared in a ROM 121, the decoration patterns having the same pattern number and stopped and displayed together in the ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 can be determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big win)'' or ``probability variation (big win)'' and whether or not promotion performance during the big win is executed, it is sufficient to determine which of the normal pattern (for example, a decoration pattern indicating an even number) or a probability variation pattern (for example, a decoration pattern indicating an odd number) to be the fixed decoration pattern. The promotion performance during a big win is a performance for informing whether or not a combination of decoration patterns (non-probability variable big win combination) that reminds of a big win but not a probability variable state is temporarily stopped and displayed on an image display device 5, and then whether or not it becomes a probability variable state during a big win game state or at the end of the big win game state.例文帳に追加

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'' or ``probability variation (big hit)'', in step 60AKS011, it may be determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion performance such as a re-lottery performance or a promotion performance during a big win. In the re-lottery performance, the decorative patterns of the non-probability variable big winning combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, making it difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns are controlled to the variable probability state, and the decorative patterns are again variably displayed (re-varyed) and the decorative patterns of the variable probability big winning combination consisting of the same variable probability patterns are stop-displayed so that the player can be recognizably notified of the control to the variable probability state. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, as the special figure fluctuation time performance control pattern and the operation performance control pattern, it is not limited to setting separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each performance may be set. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (step 60AKS014). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation effect control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the variation of the decorative pattern may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and the pending display in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "8" is moved (shifted) leftward one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. When the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, setting may be made to update the active display in the active display area without updating the pending display. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 15-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability/high-base state, the effect permission condition may be satisfied.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-B. According to the execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-win B is executed than when the ready-to-win to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed among ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win such as SP ready-to-win A and SP ready-to-win B.例文帳に追加

When the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). Whether or not to execute the operation performance and the number of times of execution in the case of executing the operation performance may be determined by referring to an operation performance execution determination table stored in advance in a ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation performance execution. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, as the presence or absence of the operation presentation and the number of times, any one of "no execution" in which the operation presentation is not executed, "five times execution" in which the number of times the operation presentation is executed is five, and "ten times execution" in which the number of times the operation presentation is executed is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The setting suggestion count indicates the number of operation effects executed as the setting suggestion effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data representing the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. Numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be zero. When the jackpot type is ``probability variable'', the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios depending on whether the number of execution times of the operation performance is ``five times execution'' or ``ten times execution'' is 10 times.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern may be determined as one of a plurality of suggested setting patterns each time the operation performance is executed by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in a ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the suggested setting pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value reporting is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as value notification effects among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, the number of times of value reporting may be determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value reporting previously stored in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value reporting. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the number of times of value notification is determined at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed five times" or "executed ten times" of ten times.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value reporting pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of value reporting patterns for each execution frequency of the operation presentation based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''.

When the display result of the variable display is determined not to be a ``big win'' at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or after the value notification pattern is determined at step 60AKS030, the number of advance notice performances is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. As for the notice performance pattern, one of a plurality of notice performance patterns may be determined for each execution number of operation performance by referring to a notice performance pattern determination table stored in advance in a ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice performance pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 15-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The ready-to-win performance contents are determined corresponding to the variable pattern and the display result of the variable display, and may include 'SP reach A (big win)', 'SP reach B (big win)', 'SP reach A (losing)' and 'SP reach B (losing)'. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", SP ready-to-win A ready-to-win effect is executed as a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-3, when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of the display result of the variable display to "losing" is higher than that of "executing 5 times" in which the number of execution times of the operation presentation is 5 or "executing 10 times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is 10 times. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-3, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-B is executed, it is determined to be “executed 10 times” in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A is executed. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of execution times of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of the SP ready-to-win B having a higher expectation for big win than the ready-to-win performance of the SP to-win A is increased, and the expectation of the player is effectively enhanced. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 15-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determination in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 15-4(A) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 15-4(B) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variable'' when not controlled to the probability variable state and ``probability variable'' when controlled to the probability variable state according to the game state controlled after the jackpot game state is finished. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes a ``big hit'' at a higher rate than when not controlled to the variable probability state, and a game value advantageous to the player is given to the player so that the game is easily controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-4, when the jackpot type is "variable probability", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-variable probability". For example, in both cases of ``execute 5 times'' and ``execute 10 times'', if the jackpot type is ``unprobability variable'', the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100, and the setting suggestion performance is not performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of ``five-time execution'', if the jackpot type is ``variable probability'', the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 30/100. In the case of ``execute 10 times'', if the jackpot type is ``variable odds'', the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100, the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 3 is 25/100, and the decision rate to set the suggested number of times to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion being other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of execution times of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestion times which is not determined in the case of 5 times, and the ratio of executing more setting suggestion performances is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is ``variable probability'', setting suggestion performance can be executed at a higher rate than ``non-variable probability'', so in the case of ``variable probability'' which is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the type of big win is ``non-variable'', it is possible to perform operation performance as setting suggestion performance at a high rate in response to control to the big win game state. In addition, only in the case of ``variable probability'', which is the most advantageous jackpot classification among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as ``non-variable probability'' or ``variable probability'', the operation performance as setting suggestive performance can be executed. Among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to ``variable probability'' of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance can be executed at a predetermined rate, while in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to a ``non-probability variation'' of a jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, a limit may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as a setting suggestion performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a limit may be set such that, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to ``variable odds'' of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, an operation performance as a set suggestion performance can be executed at a high rate, while an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance can be performed at a low rate in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to a ``non-variable'' jackpot type with a low degree of advantage.

FIG. 15-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are determined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the set value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3 corresponds to a case where the set value is high (large value) and the expectation level is high, so that the content of the suggestion is "high level of expectation with high setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 15-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 15-6(A) shows an example of determination in the case of the final operation effect in a plurality of operation effects. FIGS. 15-6 (B1) and 15-6 (B2) show examples of determination in the case of operation effects other than the final one in a plurality of operation effects, FIG. 15-6 (B1) is an example of determination when suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 15-6 (B2) is an example of determination when suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns that are usage patterns are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100 and cannot be determined. Therefore, when the operation performance as the setting suggesting performance is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggesting performance by the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5 suggesting that the set value is the highest in the degree of advantage for the player is executed at a predetermined ratio as the final operation performance, and is not executed as the operation performance other than the final time. As a result, at the second timing later than the first timing out of the first timing and the second timing capable of executing the setting suggesting performance a plurality of times, the setting suggesting performance suggesting that the set value with the highest degree of advantage for the player can be executed at a higher rate than the first timing.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-6, when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for an operation effect other than the final one, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 is 0/100 regardless of the set value, and the determination is disabled. Therefore, when the operation performance as the setting suggesting performance is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggesting performance by the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a prescribed ratio as one of the operation performances, and the same mode is prevented from being executed again or repeatedly. In this way, when the operation performance as the setting suggestion performance is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 can be executed at a predetermined ratio in the range where the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not yet executed.

On the other hand, when the operation performance as the setting suggestion performance is executed a plurality of times, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion performance by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. In addition, since the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation performance, when the operation performance as the setting suggestion performance is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range executed as the setting suggestion performance for the final time, while the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed in the range to be executed as the setting suggestion performance other than the final time. In this way, when the operation performance as the setting suggesting performance is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggesting performance by the setting suggesting patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggesting performance is executed one time, but is restricted as a limit that it cannot be executed in the range in which the setting suggesting performance is executed a plurality of times. When operation performances as setting suggestion performances are executed a plurality of times, the range of the setting suggestion performances by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 of the setting suggestion performances by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 may be executed in the same manner, while the setting suggestion performances by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 are not executed in the same manner.

FIG. 15-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 15-7(A) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 15-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. At step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of value notifications is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion frequency is determined to be 0 or 1 if the number of times of execution of the operation performance is ``executed 5 times'' by step 60AKS025 of operation performance determination processing, and is determined to be 0 to 4 if the number of times of execution of the operation performance is ``performed 10 times''.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined rate. More specifically, in the case of “executed 10 times”, if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 55/100, the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 2 is 20/100, the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 3 is 15/100, and the determination ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 4 is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, the set value can be suggested by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation performance as the setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the operation performance as the value information performance is executed, while the limitation is set as the limit that the operation performance as the value information performance is not executed in the range where the operation performance as the value information performance is not executed. Note that the operation performance as the setting suggesting performance may be restricted as a limit such that it is executable at a high rate in the range where the operation performance as the value information performance is executed, while it is executable at a low rate in the range where the operation performance as the value information performance is not executed.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggestion count is 0, the decision ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio for setting the value notification count to 1 is 30/100. In the case of “10 executions”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the determination ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 10/100, the determination ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 15/100, the determination ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 3 is 25/100, and the determination ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 4 is 30/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a case where the display result of the variable display becomes a ``big hit'' after the execution of the operation performance is finished without executing the operation performance of the setting suggestion performance or the value notification performance. Therefore, even when the number of execution times of the operation performance reaches the number of times notified by the number-of-times notification performance during the execution of the variable display and the execution of the operation performance ends, the possibility of the display result of the variable display becoming a ``big hit'' remains, so that the expectation of the player can be prevented from being spoiled by the end of the operation performance.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-7, it is possible to determine the number of times of value notification other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "executed 5 times" and the case of "executed 10 times". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect is increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "executed 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times to values other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestions to 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the rate of value notification number being determined to be 0 is higher than the rate of being determined to be 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "execute 10 times", even if the setting suggestion count is 0, the value notification count is determined to be other than 0 at step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing, at a higher rate. By such setting, in the case of ``executing 10 times'' in which the number of times of execution of the operation performance is larger than that of ``executing 5 times,'' the rate of determining the number of times of value reporting to be other than 0 increases, and the rate of executing the value reporting performance increases. In addition, when the number of execution times of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value reporting times which is not determined in the case of 5 times, and the ratio of executing more value reporting performances can be increased.

By steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation performance determination processing, in the case of ``executed 5 times'', both the frequency of setting suggestion and the frequency of value notification are determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion performance nor the value notification performance to be executed increases, and in the case of ``10 times of execution,'' both the frequency of setting suggestion and the frequency of value notification are determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion performance and the value notification performance to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of operation effects is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, setting suggesting effects and value notification effects may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 15-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the performance control process timer is updated (for example, subtracted by 1), and it is determined that the variable display time has passed when an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the updated performance control process timer value. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, it is sufficient to display a predetermined effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, output a predetermined effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turn on, turn off, or blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, operate the movable member for effect, or combine some or all of these, so that various effects can be executed by the predetermined effect device.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 15-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

If it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set after the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be after the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state in a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period at step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control at step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set so as to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. When it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggesting performance period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, based on the setting in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other control for executing the performance during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is performed (step 60AKS054), and then the performance processing during variable display is finished.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. When a predetermined time elapses without receiving the pattern confirmation command after the variable display time has passed, predetermined error processing may be executed in response to the failure to normally receive the pattern confirmation command. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (fixed decoration pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative patterns (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 15-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 15-9(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 15-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings of operation-related effects including number-of-games notification effects and operation effects. When the variable display is started at timing T0, it becomes a number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect, which is the notice effect, can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation performance that is a plurality of announcement performances is executed, the announcement performances included in the multiple announcement performances such as the first announcement, the second announcement, . . . are executed in order. The advance notice performance period may be included not only in the period in which the pre-ready-to-win variation is performed before the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also partly included in the period in which the post-ready-to-win variation is performed after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance in the advance notice performance period, it is possible to execute the performance for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a ``big win'' based on the detection of the action of the player such as the depressing operation of the push button 31B.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the determined decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process enables execution of the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation performance as a value notification performance is executed a plurality of times, each value notification performance included in the value notification performance of a plurality of times such as the first notification, the second notification, . . . is executed in order. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, it becomes possible to execute the performance of notifying whether or not to be controlled to the probability variable state after the big win game state is finished, based on the detection of the player's motion such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance is executed a plurality of times, setting suggestion performances included in the setting suggestion performances of a plurality of times such as a first suggestion, a second suggestion, . . . are sequentially executed. By executing the operation performance as the setting suggestion performance in the setting suggestion performance period, the performance of suggesting the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect is executed as a value notification effect for informing whether or not the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit notification is performed at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of operation performance determination processing, when the jackpot type is ``probability variable'', the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'', and the setting suggestion performance is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, when the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as ``non-probable variable'' or ``variable probability,'' when the value notification performance reports that the jackpot game state is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state, the suggestive performance mode is performed in a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the value notification performance is performed to control the jackpot game state to a low-advantage game state. It becomes possible to execute a setting suggestion effect as an operation effect of .

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it becomes difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the invention of the present application, since the setting suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be improved so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode even after the operation performance of the advance notice performance and the value notification performance is finished.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, in response to control to the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot game state with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'', the set suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period only when the value notification performance is notified to control to the jackpot game state with the highest advantage.

In general, it is difficult to further raise the player's expectation after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggesting performance as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the prescribed period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, so that even after the lapse of the prescribed period, the performance can be diversified so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 15-10 and 15-11 show examples of execution of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be 10 times, that is, "executed 10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of setting suggestions are both determined to be 2. Therefore, after the operation performance as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 15-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when a big win notification is executed by a big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decorative patterns of the non-probability variable big win combination consisting of the same normal patterns are displayed, the player is given the impression that the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable" and not controlled to the probability variable state.

FIG. 15-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 15-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 15-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player as the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is ``variable probability'' is not reported, so that the failure notification performance giving the impression that the variable probability state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 15-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 15-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player as the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the big win type is ``probability variable'' is reported, so that the success report performance of notifying that the big win game state is controlled to the probability variable state is executed. In addition, as the decorative patterns stopped and displayed together in the ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the normal patterns showing the number '6' are changed to the probability variable patterns showing the number '7'. When the decorative patterns of the variable probability big winning combination consisting of the same variable probability symbols are displayed, the big winning type is controlled to the big winning game state corresponding to the "variable probability", and the player can recognize that it is controlled to the variable probability state. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 15-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 15-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image indicating the push button 31B together with the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 15-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. The characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are displayed in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, so that the player can recognize the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image.

FIG. 15-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first setting suggesting performance is started, a performance image corresponding to the setting suggesting performance and a performance image showing the push button 31B are displayed to prompt the player's action such as pressing operation on the push button 31B. FIG. 15-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 15-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 15-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying decoration symbols of a probability variable jackpot combination, which is a fixed decoration symbol, corresponding to the end of the variable display. After that, based on the display result of the variable display being "big hit", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

As a specific example, instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 15-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-variable probability", it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "variable probability". In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-4, the setting suggestion number may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a higher rate than the 'probability variable' when the jackpot type is 'non-probability variable', in the case of the 'non-probability variation' which is the jackpot type having a lower advantage than the 'probability variation', the operation performance of the setting suggestion performance can be executed at a high rate in response to the control to the big win game state. In addition, only in the case of ``non-probability variable'', which is the jackpot type with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'', the operation performance as setting suggestion performance may be executed. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, the jackpot types may be controllable to jackpot game states with different numbers of rounds instead of the jackpot game states with "non-probability variable" or "probability variable". For example, a jackpot type corresponding to the number of rounds may be provided, such as "4R" when the number of rounds is 4, "6R" when the number of rounds is 6, "8R" when the number of rounds is 8, and "10R" when the number of rounds is 10. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Even in such a case, in response to control to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, when information to be controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is given by a value notification performance, a set suggestion performance may be executed as an operation performance of a suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when information to be controlled to a jackpot game state with a low degree of advantage is given. In addition, only when a value notification performance informs control to the jackpot game state with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, the setting suggestion performance may be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the prescribed period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to control to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, when a value notification performance is performed to control to a jackpot game state with a low advantage, a setting suggestion performance may be executed as an operation performance of a suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of control to a jackpot game state with a high advantage is performed. Alternatively, the set suggesting performance may be executed as the operation performance of the suggesting performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the prescribed period only when the value reporting performance informs control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the content of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Further, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself, and may include a part or all of execution of a specific performance such as execution of a ready-to-win performance as super reach, display of a performance image as a premium character, reproduction of a sound as a premium music, and display of an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation presentation is not limited to the case of ``five times execution'', which is 5 times, or the case of ``ten times execution'', which is 10 times, but it may be set to an arbitrary number of executions capable of executing a plurality of times of operation presentation. Also in this case, when the number of executions of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small, and the setting suggestion presentation may be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of the operation performance is large, it is possible to determine the number of times of setting suggestion which is not determined when the number of times of execution of the operation performance is small, or the ratio of executing more setting suggestion performance may be increased.

Instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 15-6, for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns, a restriction may be provided so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not it is the final operation presentation or whether the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, setting suggestion patterns are determined at a common determination ratio, and when a predetermined replacement condition is established, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting execution of the setting suggestion presentation by the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the determination of the set value of 6 may be made easier to execute. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the definite notification that the set value is 6 may be difficult to execute.

A setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so as not to be executed as a setting suggestion performance by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined release condition is satisfied after being executed once. For example, during a period of repeated control to the big win game state without being controlled to the normal state, the release condition is not established, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the setting suggestion performance by the same setting suggestion pattern may be restricted so as not to be executed. When the setting suggesting performance by the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value is highly advantageous to the player, so that the rarity of such setting suggesting performance can be increased to improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of advance notice performance patterns, a notice performance pattern having a different decision ratio depending on the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 or a notice performance pattern that can be determined only when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a specific value may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is only necessary that the notice performance pattern for informing a message of ``reliability 66%'' can be determined, or the determined values in the notice performance pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of notice performance patterns so that the determination ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-2, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, the setting suggestion frequency can be determined, and when the value notification frequency is determined to be 0, the setting suggestion frequency is not determined and the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate, thereby diversifying the performance so that the player can recognize the change of the setting value and improving the game interest.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect that is the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect that is the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect does not have to be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', the operation performance such as value notification performance and setting suggesting performance may be executed along with execution of big win start performance (fanfare performance) and performance during big win (performance corresponding to the 1st round and the 2nd round, etc.). The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode may be such that the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. For example, in the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the determined values in the setting suggestion pattern determination table may be assigned to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns so that the determination ratio of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the determination ratio of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to analyze the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand (video motion capture), and an arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restriction may be a condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or action execution different.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is advantageous to a player and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, for example, a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, which can be set to any of set values from 1 to 6, for example, setting means such as a CPU 103 for executing the set value change processing of FIGS. Based on this, for example, an action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the process of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, and 60AKS053 shown in FIG. 15-8, which can execute action effects such as an advance notice effect, a value notification effect, and a setting suggestion effect, and an action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, and 60AKS053 shown in FIG. The execution pattern of the operation performance by the operation performance executing means includes a first execution pattern in which the number of times of execution indicated in the notification performance is executed within a predetermined period, for example, when the variable display result is not a ``big hit'' or the determination result of the set suggestion number is 0, and the number of times of execution less than the number of times indicated in the notification performance is performed within a predetermined period, and the remaining number of executions is performed after the predetermined period. A second execution pattern for executing an effect, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" and the determination result of the set suggestion number is other than 0 is included, and the action effect execution means can execute the action effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time as shown in FIGS. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 for executing the process of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. 15-8 is provided, and the action effect execution means, for example, when the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the process of step 60AKS024 shown in FIG. In a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, it may be possible to execute the action effect of the suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the interest in the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The advantageous state can be controlled to a plurality of types of advantageous states, including a first advantageous state, for example, when the jackpot type is "variable odds", and a second advantageous state, which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state, for example, when the type of jackpot is "variable", and the action effect executing means is controlled to the first advantageous state by the advantageous notifying means, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestive effect mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the notification of is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The advantageous state can be controlled to a plurality of types of advantageous states, including a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", and a second advantageous state having a higher degree of advantage than the first advantageous state, for example, when the jackpot type is "variable probability". When the notification is made, it may be possible to execute the action performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the second advantageous state is made. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as a jackpot type having a different degree of advantage for the player, for example, one of "non-probable variable" and "variable probability" for the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

For example, when the setting suggestion frequency shown in FIG. 15-4 is determined to be one of 2 to 4, the action effect executing means can execute the action effect in any of the plurality of modes as the action effect of the suggestive effect mode a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period, and restricts the action effect of the suggestive effect mode from being executed in the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, the setting suggestion at the determined ratio shown in FIG. 15-6 in the processing of step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 15-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the pattern may be provided. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

The operation production method can be executed at the first timing, such as the first timing, such as the first timing of the first suggestion, and the second statement of the second suggestion, for example, in the specific period after the specified period after the prescribed period,, for example, Fig. 15-6, 15-6, in Fig. 15-4. As described, the operation production that suggests that the advantage is the highest advantage for the player may be executed at a higher percentage than the first timing at the second timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to draw attention to the action effects of the suggestive effect mode.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that gives an advance notice of being controlled in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 16-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 16-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 may be an integrated processor in which circuits capable of controlling the execution of effects using some or all of a plurality of effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the movable members for effect such as the movable body 32 are integrated into one chip by executing data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main board 11. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 may be provided outside the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of performance images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, should be prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, any character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image may be stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or counts down based on the setting of an internal register, and generates a timeout signal as a time elapsed signal when a timeout occurs after the measurement time has passed the start time (timeout time). The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 91AK 124 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 91AK 131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns. The production control pattern includes, for example, production control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the production control process timer judgment value, and process data including end codes. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The effect control process includes, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data write process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, a variable data read process in which the CPU91AK131 reads out various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125, and the CPU91AK131 receives input of various signals from the outside. It may include reception processing, transmission processing in which the CPU 91AK131 outputs various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 may perform image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily store the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image designated by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer is used to temporarily store palette data defining the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and to temporarily store display data of effect images created by the drawing processing. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 may output a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (grayscale control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer may be bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The frame buffer may include, for example, a real display area storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and a virtual display area storing display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as that of the display screen of the image display device 5 may be generated in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area may be supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148 to be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from VDP 91AK132 to CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from VDP 91AK132 to CPU 91AK131. By switching the image display area and the image drawing area each time the V blank occurs, the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period) performs drawing processing for creating display data of each effect image, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the display data created by the drawing process is stored in the storage area to which the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), etc. for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 16-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the performance control pattern, etc., may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as management data.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining a procedure for displaying effect images, etc. may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. The moving image data may be a multiplexed encoded stream in which image compression information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of a plurality of frames serving as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the moving image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector format or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of a plurality of vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by designating straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, and indicates arbitrarily set word units such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these in a recognizable manner. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, may indicate captions, or may indicate other information transmission characters or decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronism with the image in the performance by moving image display, so long as it enables the reproduction and output of any sound with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 16-3 shows an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table according to ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the animation display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 16-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'' or ``SP ready-to-win A (losing)'', and cannot be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win B (big winning)'' or ``SP ready-to-win B (losing)''. Text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win B (big win)'' or ``SP ready-to-win B (losing)'', and cannot be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'' or ``SP ready-to-win A (losing)''. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the contents of ready-to-win performance are ``SP reach A (big hit)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP reach A (losing)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. When the contents of ready-to-win performance are ``SP reach B (big hit)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP reach B (losing)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 16-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 16-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 16-4 (A2) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in correspondence with reach effect of SP reach A. FIG. 16-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time after the display of the moving image in the ready-to-win performance is started, or may be specified using the elapsed time after the variable display is started. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, it is desirable to specify the start time and end time of the text display period using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode, the timing of starting the display of the moving image may differ even with the common ready-to-win performance due to the variable display performance before the ready-to-reach mode. Even in such a case, if the start time and the end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing of displaying the specific image in the moving image and the timing of displaying the specific text image can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information may be information that specifies the content of the text image to be displayed using arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 16-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 16-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 16-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. FIG. 16-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00 when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach A is executed, and the display of the moving image is started to be displayed at timing T10 when the ready-to-reach performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 16-4(A1), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. 16-5(A1). Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 16-4(A2), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. 16-5(A2). Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 are set so that the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 includes the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 and the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. Thus, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 as a third text display period included in the first text display period. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, of the first text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added to the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image can be changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, it is possible to change the constituent elements in the display of the text image by changing the text image to be displayed in at least part of a plurality of text display periods. In addition, when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image used as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be changed for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changeable, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changeable.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 16-4(B), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, as shown in FIG. 16-5(B). A text image designated by text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed during a text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, and a text image designated by text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed during a text display period from timing T13 to timing T14. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19.

FIG. 16-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 16-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 16-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 16-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 16-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 as the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by. By such setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T02 and the period from the timing T03 to the timing T04 in the first text display period. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that it is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 so that the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 and displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the display style or display layout displayed by the information 91AKB13.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this manner, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 can be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in the second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image can be displayed by changing the display mode such that the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode and the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 16-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 16-4(A2), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 16-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 16-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 16-4(A2), the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 16-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content of the common first component in the corresponding text display period, the display mode of the second component related to the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the content of the ready-to-win effect even when the same text image is designated by the text image designation information. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", for example, whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. Thus, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that various text images can be displayed while preventing an increase in data capacity and an increase in processing load. If the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may be correspondingly changeable. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image tends to be easily visually recognized by the player, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image tends to be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the display size of the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, may be changed so that the font size becomes larger than when the display color of the text image is white. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white should be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of incongruity in displaying the text image.

FIG. 16-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the ready-to-reach presentation of SP reach A, moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01 is performed when the display result of variable display is ``big hit'', and moving image display using moving image data 91AKD11 is performed when the display result of variable display is ``losing''. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a performance display as a battle performance in which a common ally character and an enemy character fight each other is performed, and, for example, the contents of the performance display may be common until the timing when the result of the battle is notified. Further, when the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', the decision ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is ``losing'', the decision ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during a moving image display period as the contents of common performance display, the degree of expectation for big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 16-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP Reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is, for example, a gothic typeface with origin coordinates (300, 30), font family AA_gothic, bold line width corresponding to bold, and text image display color from #FF0040 to #FF0040 to #40. Elements in the display of the text image are controlled such that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 16-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is, for example, a Mincho typeface with origin coordinates of (250,600) and a font family of BB_mincho, a normal line width corresponding to normal, a text image display color of #FFFFFF, and a background display color of #FFFFFF. #220C0C, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character layout is left aligned, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 16-7(B1) includes effect contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. The components in the text image are controlled so that FFFF, the normal typeface corresponding to the character style normal, the character placement in the center, and the character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, character style, and character arrangement are changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information.

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 16-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from those of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, for example, a typeface classified as a Mincho typeface with origin coordinates of (250,600) and a font family of DD_mincho, a font size of 72px, a bold line width corresponding to bold, a gold color corresponding to "gold", and a background display. The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the color is #000000, the character style is normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, the font size, the thickness of the characters, the display color of the text image, the background display color, the character style, the character arrangement and the character decoration are changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed may be set individually. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image designated by the text image designation information, if one data among data corresponding to a plurality of fields included in the text display setting information is changed and displayed, other data previously associated with the one data may also be changed and displayed. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color can be set in 256 steps so that the luminance (gradation) of each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is at any level from "0" to "255". In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field may have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a common data format with the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a unique data format different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, it may be possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using specific information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, it is possible to display a glossy text image and add an effect image for displaying gold around the text image. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 16-7 (B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 sets the display style for gold display, etc., so that the specific text image showing the line "hot" is displayed with glossiness, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the Pachinko game machine 1, when the performance by the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the performance by the text image display using the text image data is added so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the performance and the information different from the contents of the performance can be easily provided. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, there is a risk that the text image display using text image data that has been decompressed and decoded may cause problems such as blurring of outlines and deterioration of display quality. In addition, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also tends to increase. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, by adding the effect by text image display using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the contents of the effect can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, since an effect by text image display using text image data stored separately from moving image data is added, it is possible to appropriately control display capable of preventing as much as possible an increase in the data capacity of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 can execute image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Thus, in the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display contents of the text image as the first constituent element and the display mode of the text image as the second constituent element can be changed according to the elapsed time or the like. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When the content of the ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'', a text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed when the performance by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. When the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-reach A (losing)'', a text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed when performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. In addition, when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win B (big win)'', a text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed when performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win B (losing)'', a text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed when performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By making it possible to add text images using common data to multiple moving images and display them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specifying information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 may be used to display a text image showing the words "very hot" so that the display style can be changed at a plurality of timings. The text image showing the line "Super hot" may be a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image with display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is likely to result in a "jackpot". Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 16-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042, and the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, a typeface whose font family is DD_mincho classified as a Mincho font in the fontFamily field and a font size of 72px are set in the fontSize field.

FIG. 16-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 16-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 16-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, when the character decoration of the text image is set to effect display for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image by, for example, the display color of the border and shadow of the text image, the boundary display by beveling and embossing, the layer style for adding luster, and a combination of some or all of these. Thus, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding and displaying the effect image around the text image, the player can easily recognize the gold display, and the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image may be displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 may be set so that a part of the text image "character" in the text information showing the line "if this character wins..." has a text image display color, a background display color and a character style different from those of the other parts.

FIG. 16-9 shows a display example in which a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "character" is displayed in a white display color, a black background display color and an italic character style, and the other part of the text image is displayed in a black display color, a white background color and a normal character style. The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the display color of the text image in the color field, black corresponding to #000000 as the background display color in the backgroundColor field, and italic corresponding to the italic character style in the fontStyle field, respectively, corresponding to a portion of the text image "character". In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the text image display color is black corresponding to #000000 in the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the character style is normal in the fontStyle field. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when music performance or speech reproduction of lines progresses with moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress may be displayed in a display style different from the other parts, such as specific color display or highlight display. It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the elapsed time in the execution of an arbitrary performance without being limited to the situation in which the performance of music or the voice reproduction of lines accompanying the moving image display progresses. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, either one of the display control that makes it possible to change the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component according to the elapsed time or the display control that makes it possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images may be executed, but not the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image may be changeable. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set regarding the display of text images, such as the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the magnification and reduction ratios when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, and the time interval and amount of change for updating the enlargement and reduction ratios when these enlargement and reduction ratios are changed according to the elapsed time.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display content, changing the display mode of the text image is not limited to changing the display color of the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. For example, for the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, any display mode, such as origin coordinates, font family, font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these, may be changed instead of or in addition to the display color of the text image during the corresponding text display period. A text image having a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from that of the text image having a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01.

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, may be multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of moving image data, and a text image in a specific mode may be displayed by decompressing and decoding video data separated from this moving image data. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image data may include specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table may be composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields, or may be composed of field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 can be read without using the font data, and the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be prepared as data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko game machine 1, such as general-purpose Japanese font data. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display performance are stored in a storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data is facilitated, so that the burden of designing performance for displaying text images can be reduced, and an increase in data capacity can be prevented when a large amount of text images are used in display performance.

As a second constituent element related to the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at a plurality of timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "Extremely hot", and may be any text image preset as the specific text image corresponding to the specific first constituent element group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, it may be possible to change the second component such as the display mode at a plurality of timings for the specific text image corresponding to the audio effect or the display effect, such as the reproduction output of music or the reproduction display of a moving image, in which the effect contents change according to the elapsed time. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry pattern, may be used as the specific text image. Alternatively, the specific text image may be a text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a "jackpot" than the text image of the display content suggesting that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (e.g., "15") that is larger than the second round number (e.g., "7"), the upper limit number of variable display that can be performed in the time saving state is the second number (e.g., "50"). The number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times that the game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled, becomes the number of consecutive chances (for example, "10") greater than the number of second consecutive chances (for example, "5").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when a preset specific text image is displayed, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, it is sufficient to set the text decoration field or the like in the text display setting information so that the text image can be displayed with an effect image added around it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field of the text display setting information, the rainbow display may be enabled by changing the different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. For example, at the coordinates in the character of 1, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed such that the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, followed by green, then light blue, then blue, and then bluish purple to reddish purple. At this time, taking into account that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that a change in blue becomes darker, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted, and the display colors at the coordinates within each character are changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image constituent element, such as when the color field of the text display setting information sets the display color of the text image to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow", it may be possible to display a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the coordinates within the character and the display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the text display process table. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components, or may be changeable to any one of a plurality of components at different ratios, depending on whether or not the player's specific action is detected. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image may be, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or any other operation of tilting the operation rod of the V stick controller 31A, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target, without being limited to those that can detect the player's actions. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target may have any configuration that can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the setting value is 3, 20/100 (=20%) if the setting value is 4, and 15/100 (=15%) if the setting value is 5. A value of 6 may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the setting value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the setting value is 4, and 85/100 (=85%) if the setting value is 5. A value of 6 may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win A (big hit)'', the ratio of executing the performance by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is varied according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the performance by the text image display corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the ratio of executing the performance by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 increases. Therefore, when the content of the ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'' and the performance by the text image display corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player increases.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of judgment or determination of the game, or any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 or the judgment or determination of the performance. Arbitrary performances may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, without being limited to setting suggestion performances, performance modes may be determined at different percentages depending on whether such conditions are satisfied, or execution timings may be determined at different percentages depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. Any performance may be limited as a limit that a specific performance is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied, or may be set as a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered compared to a range where the limit condition is not satisfied and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine, such as pachinko machine 1, capable of executing a game, and capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as SP reach A or SP reach B, effect execution means such as effect control microprocessor 91AK100; a video decoder 91AK143, a video renderer 91AK144, etc., for controlling the display of a video image using the data stored in the first storage region; and a character image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, for example, for controlling the display of character images using the data stored in the second storage region. Data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element and a second constituent element such as a display style set by text display setting information, for example, is included, and the character image control means can change the first constituent element and the second constituent element during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period, as shown in FIG. 16-8, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "hot", for example, and can change the second component related to the specific character image at a plurality of timings, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component related to the character image, as shown in FIG. 16-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as "gold" is set in the color field as a character image constituent element, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

For example, when a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple, for example, within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in the character or the display time range. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine, such as pachinko machine 1, capable of executing a game, and capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as SP reach A or SP reach B, effect execution means such as effect control microprocessor 91AK100; a video decoder 91AK143, a video renderer 91AK144, etc., for controlling the display of a video image using the data stored in the first storage region; and a character image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, for example, for controlling the display of character images using the data stored in the second storage region. Data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element and a second constituent element such as a display style set by the text display setting information, for example, the character image control means, for the first moving image such as the moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the second moving image different from the first moving image such as the moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, the text according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image such as an image. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-8, the character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "hot", for example, and can change the second component related to the specific character image at a plurality of timings, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component related to the character image, as shown in FIG. 16-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as "gold" is set in the color field as a character image constituent element, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

For example, when a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple, for example, within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in the character or the display time range. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the lapse of a predetermined period can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that is an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode, and in the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, and the character image using the data related to the common character image can be added and displayed for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10: general winning port 11: main board 12: performance control board 13: audio control board 14: LED control board 15: relay board 17: special variable winning ball device 20: normal symbol display device 21: gate switches 22A, 22B: starting port switch 23: first count switch 24: second count switch 30: batting operation Handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit 91AK100... Production control microprocessor 91AK131... CPU
91AK132 … VDP
91AK143 ... Video decoder 91AK144 ... Video image renderer 91AK146 ... Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 ... Storage area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game and capable of being set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player ,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image,
The effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state,
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
When the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component configured by the first character information and a second component configured by the first display setting information, and second data for displaying the second character image using the first component configured by the second character information and the second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table includes the first data, the third data for displaying the third character image using the first component configured by the third character information and the second component configured by the third display setting information,
When a specific element is set as a character image component, an effect image can be added around the character image and displayed,
a ratio of displaying a character image using the first character image data table or the second character image data table differs between when the setting value is the first setting value and when the setting value is the second setting value;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images